User Guide (Printer/Scanner) - Fuji Xerox Worldwide
User Guide (Printer/Scanner) - Fuji Xerox Worldwide
User Guide (Printer/Scanner) - Fuji Xerox Worldwide
You also want an ePaper? Increase the reach of your titles
YUMPU automatically turns print PDFs into web optimized ePapers that Google loves.
DocumentCentre C400/320/240 Series<br />
<strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (<strong>Printer</strong>/<strong>Scanner</strong>)<br />
This PDF file is best viewed using Acrobat ® Reader 5
Using the printer to print copies of bank notes or securities is illegal and punishable, regardless of whether they<br />
are being used.<br />
Microsoft, MS-DOS, Windows, Windows NT, Microsoft Network are trademarks or registered trademarks of<br />
Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and other countries.<br />
Novell, NetWare, IntranetWare, NDS are registered trademarks of Novell, Inc. in the United States. and other<br />
countries.<br />
Adobe, Acrobat, PostScript, Postscript 3, and the PostScript logo are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.<br />
Apple, AppleTalk, EtherTalk, LocalTalk, Macintosh, Mac OS, TrueType are registered trademarks of Apple<br />
Computer, Inc.<br />
Intel and Pentium are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation.<br />
UNIX is a registered trademark in the United States and other countries, licensed exclusively through X/Open<br />
Company Ltd.<br />
Solaris, Sun OS, and NIS (Network Information Services) are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun<br />
Microsystems Inc. in the United States.<br />
HP, HPGL, HPGL/2 and HP-UX are registered trademarks of Japan Hewlett Packard Company.<br />
All product/brand names are trademarks or registered trademarks of the respective holders.<br />
Permission has been obtained from Microsoft Corporation for use of software screen shots.<br />
Our printer software uses some of the codes created by the Independent JPEG Group.<br />
Saved data may be lost if hard disk of the machine breaks down due to external shocks or if the power is<br />
accidentally cut off in a manner not following the methods listed in manuals or other documentations. <strong>Fuji</strong> <strong>Xerox</strong><br />
is not responsible for such data loss and any consequence caused by such data loss.<br />
<strong>Fuji</strong> <strong>Xerox</strong> is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due to infection of computer virus.<br />
Important<br />
1 This guide is copyrighted with all rights reserved. Under the copyright laws, this guide may not be copied in<br />
whole or part, without the written consent of the publisher.<br />
2 Parts of this guide are subjected to change without prior notice.<br />
3 We welcome any comments on ambiguities, errors, omissions or missing pages.<br />
4<br />
Never attempt any procedure on the machine that is not specifically described in this guide. Unauthorized<br />
operation can cause faults or accidents. <strong>Fuji</strong> <strong>Xerox</strong> is not liable for any problems resulting from unauthorized<br />
operation of the equipment.<br />
<strong>Xerox</strong>, The Document Company and Ethernet are registered trademarks.<br />
DocuWorks and CentreWare are trademarks.
Preface<br />
Thank you for purchasing the <strong>Fuji</strong> <strong>Xerox</strong> DocumentCentre C400/320/240 Series.<br />
Written with the new user in mind, this <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (<strong>Printer</strong>/<strong>Scanner</strong>) provides all the necessary<br />
information and precautions on operating the printer/scanner functions as well as using<br />
this machine as a network printer.<br />
To get the most out of this machine, please read this guide before using it. This guide is written<br />
with the assumption that you are familiar with the basic knowledge and way of operating<br />
your computer and the network environment. After reading it keep this guide handy as a reference<br />
for problems which you might encounter when using this machine.<br />
For more information on using this machine and the copier features, see the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong><br />
(Copier) and for information on fax features, see the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Facsimile).<br />
In this guide, DocumentCentre C400/320/240 may be referred to as the DocumentCentre<br />
C400/320/240 series.<br />
In this guide, precautions are indicated with the symbol . Always read and follow these instructions<br />
before carrying out the required procedure. Also, thoroughly read the Safety Notes provided in this<br />
guide.<br />
As a member of the International Star Program, <strong>Fuji</strong> <strong>Xerox</strong> certifies that this product satisfies<br />
the Japanese requirements for International Star Program standards.<br />
<strong>Fuji</strong> <strong>Xerox</strong> shares the global concern about environmental conservation and has integrated that concern<br />
in its business activities from research and development to disposal. We have implemented a<br />
number of programs to lessen the burden on the environment through totally eliminating ozone-depleting<br />
chlorofluorocarbons from our manufacturing facilities.<br />
We are committed to leadership in the conservation of resources by reusing and recycling post-consumer<br />
waste material such as paper, consumables such as cartridges and parts from copiers and printers<br />
of our customers.<br />
Along with our efforts to make environmental values a part of the <strong>Fuji</strong> <strong>Xerox</strong> culture, DocumentCentre<br />
C400/320/240 adopts recycled components that satisfy our strict quality standards.<br />
About reception interference<br />
If you notice flickering or distorted images or noises on your audio-visual units, your machine may be<br />
causing radio interference. Switch it off immediately. If this interference disappears, the machine is the<br />
cause of the interference. Perform the following procedure until the interference is corrected.<br />
● Reposition or re-orient the machine and the TV and/or radio.<br />
● Move the machine and the TV and/or radio away from each other.<br />
● Unplug the machine, TV and/or radio, and replug them into outlets that operate on different circuits.<br />
● Reorient the TV and/or radio antennas and cables until the interference stops. (For an outdoor<br />
antenna, ask your local electrician for support.)<br />
● Use coaxial cable antennas.<br />
This equipment is certified as a Class 1 laser product under IEC60825. This means that the machine<br />
does not emit hazardous laser radiation. Since radiation emitted inside the machine is completely confined<br />
within the protective housings and external covers, the laser beam cannot escape from the<br />
machine during any phase of user operation.<br />
This equipment complies with the guidelines set forth by the Japan Business Machine Makers<br />
Association on the harmonic affects by copiers and other reproduction devices in accordance with<br />
the guidelines on the harmonic suppressors of electronic appliances and general-purpose<br />
machines.<br />
i
ii<br />
Contents<br />
◆ Preface ...................................................................................................................................i<br />
◆ Contents ................................................................................................................................ii<br />
◆ Related <strong>Guide</strong>s .................................................................................................................. viii<br />
◆ Using This <strong>Guide</strong> ..................................................................................................................ix<br />
◆ Safety Notes ........................................................................................................................ xii<br />
Part 1 <strong>Printer</strong><br />
Chapter 1 Setting <strong>Printer</strong> Environment<br />
1.1 <strong>Printer</strong> Environments ............................................................................................. 4<br />
1.1.1 As Local <strong>Printer</strong>....................................................................................... 4<br />
1.1.2 As Network <strong>Printer</strong> .................................................................................. 5<br />
1.2 Connecting Interface Cable ................................................................................. 10<br />
1.2.1 Connecting by Parallel Interface ........................................................... 10<br />
1.2.2 Connecting by Ethernet Interface.......................................................... 11<br />
1.2.3 Connecting by Token Ring Interface ..................................................... 11<br />
1.3 Setting IP Address............................................................................................... 13<br />
1.3.1 Setting IP Address ................................................................................ 14<br />
1.4 Setting Port.......................................................................................................... 18<br />
1.4.1 Activating Port ....................................................................................... 18<br />
1.5 Memory Allocation ............................................................................................... 22<br />
Chapter 2 Setting up Network<br />
2.1 Windows Network (SMB)..................................................................................... 26<br />
2.1.1 System Structure .................................................................................. 26<br />
2.1.2 Setting Procedure ................................................................................. 27<br />
2.2 TCP/IP (LPD)....................................................................................................... 28<br />
2.2.1 System Structure .................................................................................. 28<br />
2.2.2 Setting Procedure ................................................................................. 29<br />
2.3 Using Internet Printing ......................................................................................... 30<br />
2.3.1 System Structure .................................................................................. 30<br />
2.3.2 Setting Procedure ................................................................................. 31<br />
2.4 NetWare............................................................................................................... 32<br />
2.4.1 System Structure .................................................................................. 32<br />
2.4.2 Interface ................................................................................................ 32<br />
2.4.3 Setting Procedure ................................................................................. 33
Chapter 3 Basic Printing<br />
3.1 Flow of Printing (Windows) .................................................................................. 36<br />
3.2 About Paper......................................................................................................... 37<br />
3.2.1 Difference From Copying....................................................................... 37<br />
3.2.2 Caution for Printing ............................................................................... 37<br />
3.2.3 Paper Supply......................................................................................... 38<br />
3.2.4 Outputting Paper ................................................................................... 39<br />
3.2.5 Loading Paper in Trays 1 to 4................................................................ 39<br />
3.2.6 Loading Paper in Tray 5 (Bypass Tray).................................................. 40<br />
3.2.7 Changing Paper Size of Paper Tray ...................................................... 45<br />
3.3 Printing Features ................................................................................................. 46<br />
3.3.1 Before Printing ...................................................................................... 46<br />
3.3.2 Printing Procedure ................................................................................ 46<br />
3.3.3 Setting Printing Features....................................................................... 47<br />
3.3.4 Using On-line Help ................................................................................ 49<br />
3.4 Installing/Uninstalling the <strong>Printer</strong> Drivers ............................................................. 50<br />
3.4.1 For a Local <strong>Printer</strong>................................................................................. 50<br />
3.4.2 For a Network <strong>Printer</strong> ............................................................................ 53<br />
3.4.3 Uninstalling the <strong>Printer</strong> Drivers.............................................................. 54<br />
3.5 Switching <strong>Printer</strong> Off-line ..................................................................................... 56<br />
3.6 Canceling Printing/Checking Job Status.............................................................. 57<br />
3.6.1 Canceling Printing From Computer ....................................................... 57<br />
3.6.2 Canceling Printing From <strong>Printer</strong> ............................................................ 58<br />
3.6.3 Checking Job Status of Print Instruction ............................................... 60<br />
Chapter 4 Special Printing<br />
4.1 Printing Special Papers ....................................................................................... 64<br />
4.2 Printing Non-Standard Paper Size....................................................................... 66<br />
4.2.1 Customizing Non-Standard Paper Size................................................. 66<br />
4.2.2 Printing Non-Standard Paper Size ........................................................ 68<br />
4.3 Secure Print......................................................................................................... 70<br />
4.3.1 Setting Secure Print Jobs...................................................................... 70<br />
4.3.2 Printing Secure Print Jobs..................................................................... 72<br />
4.4 Sample Print ........................................................................................................ 77<br />
4.4.1 Setting Sample Print Jobs..................................................................... 77<br />
4.4.2 Printing Sample Print Jobs.................................................................... 78<br />
4.5 Delayed Print ....................................................................................................... 83<br />
iii
iv<br />
4.5.1 Setting Delayed Print Jobs.................................................................... 83<br />
4.5.2 Printing Delayed Print Jobs................................................................... 85<br />
4.6 Expanding Print Areas for Printing ...................................................................... 89<br />
4.7 E-mail Printing ..................................................................................................... 91<br />
4.7.1 System Environment ............................................................................. 91<br />
4.7.2 Sending E-mail...................................................................................... 95<br />
4.8 Notify Job End by E-mail ..................................................................................... 97<br />
4.8.1 System Environment ............................................................................. 97<br />
4.8.2 Notifying by E-mail ................................................................................ 99<br />
4.9 Adding Banner Sheet for Printing ...................................................................... 101<br />
4.10 File Upload Printing ........................................................................................... 102<br />
Chapter 5 Configuring From Computer (CentreWare Internet Services)<br />
5.1 About CentreWare Internet Services................................................................. 106<br />
5.1.1 Introduction ......................................................................................... 106<br />
5.1.2 Structure Screen ................................................................................. 107<br />
5.1.3 System Structure ................................................................................ 108<br />
5.1.4 Target OS and Browsers ..................................................................... 109<br />
5.2 Configuring Browser .......................................................................................... 110<br />
5.2.1 For Netscape Communicator .............................................................. 110<br />
5.2.2 For Internet Explorer ........................................................................... 110<br />
5.2.3 Proxy Server and Port Number ........................................................... 111<br />
5.3 Configuring Machine.......................................................................................... 112<br />
5.4 Activating ........................................................................................................... 113<br />
5.5 Troubleshooting ................................................................................................. 114<br />
Part 2 <strong>Scanner</strong><br />
Chapter 1 Setting <strong>Scanner</strong> Environment<br />
1.1 <strong>Scanner</strong> Environment ........................................................................................ 118<br />
1.1.1 Scanning With the Mailbox.................................................................. 118<br />
1.1.2 Scanning Services With Job Template................................................ 119<br />
1.2 Flow of Configuring Scanning............................................................................ 120<br />
1.3 Using Scan Features ......................................................................................... 121<br />
1.3.1 Target OS and System Environment................................................... 121<br />
1.3.2 Connecting Cable................................................................................ 121
1.4 Configuring for Using Mailbox............................................................................ 122<br />
1.4.1 Setting IP Address .............................................................................. 122<br />
1.4.2 Activating Port for Scanning (Salutation)............................................. 122<br />
1.4.3 Creating Mailbox ................................................................................. 127<br />
1.5 Configuring for Using Job Template................................................................... 133<br />
1.5.1 Setting IP Address .............................................................................. 133<br />
1.5.2 Activating FTP Client........................................................................... 133<br />
1.6 Configuring Computer........................................................................................ 138<br />
1.6.1 Using Mailbox...................................................................................... 138<br />
1.6.2 Using Job Template............................................................................. 138<br />
1.7 Installing the Network <strong>Scanner</strong> Utility ................................................................ 139<br />
1.7.1 Required Environment......................................................................... 139<br />
1.7.2 Installation ........................................................................................... 140<br />
1.7.3 Uninstallation....................................................................................... 142<br />
Chapter 2 Documents for Scanning<br />
2.1 About Documents .............................................................................................. 144<br />
2.1.1 Suitable Document Sizes .................................................................... 144<br />
2.1.2 Automatic Document Size Sensing ..................................................... 145<br />
2.1.3 Special Documents to Note................................................................. 145<br />
2.2 Loading Documents........................................................................................... 147<br />
2.2.1 On Document Glass............................................................................ 147<br />
2.2.2 In DADF............................................................................................... 148<br />
2.2.3 Document Orientation ......................................................................... 149<br />
2.2.4 Scanning in Batches ........................................................................... 150<br />
Chapter 3 Scanning With Mailbox<br />
3.1 How to Scan ...................................................................................................... 154<br />
3.2 Canceling Scanning/Checking Job Status......................................................... 156<br />
3.2.1 Canceling Scanning From This Machine............................................. 156<br />
3.2.2 Canceling Scanning From Computer .................................................. 158<br />
3.2.3 Checking Job Status of Scan Instruction ............................................ 158<br />
3.3 Configuring Scan Settings ................................................................................. 160<br />
3.3.1 Output Color........................................................................................ 160<br />
3.3.2 Scan Resolution .................................................................................. 162<br />
3.3.3 2 Sided Originals................................................................................. 163<br />
3.3.4 Original Orientation ............................................................................. 166<br />
v
vi<br />
3.3.5 Mixed Size Originals ........................................................................... 168<br />
3.3.6 Scan Size ............................................................................................ 171<br />
3.3.7 Reduce/Enlarge .................................................................................. 174<br />
3.3.8 Bound Originals .................................................................................. 177<br />
3.3.9 Border Erase....................................................................................... 180<br />
3.3.10 Original Type ....................................................................................... 183<br />
3.3.11 Lighter/Darker/Contrast....................................................................... 185<br />
3.3.12 Auto Exposure..................................................................................... 187<br />
3.3.13 Image Compression............................................................................ 189<br />
3.3.14 File Format.......................................................................................... 191<br />
3.4 Importing Scanned Data to Computer ............................................................... 194<br />
3.4.1 Importing to Application Program........................................................ 194<br />
3.4.2 Importing From Mailbox Viewer........................................................... 199<br />
3.4.3 Importing Mailbox Data Using CentreWare Internet Services ............ 201<br />
3.5 Checking/Deleting Scanned Data in Mailbox..................................................... 203<br />
3.5.1 Checking/Deleting on This Machine.................................................... 203<br />
3.5.2 Checking/Deleting on Computer (Mailbox Viewer).............................. 206<br />
3.6 Changing Network <strong>Scanner</strong> Utility Settings....................................................... 208<br />
3.6.1 Changing Network <strong>Scanner</strong> Driver Settings........................................ 208<br />
3.6.2 Changing Mailbox Viewer Settings...................................................... 212<br />
Chapter 4 Scanning With Job Template<br />
4.1 How to Scan ...................................................................................................... 216<br />
4.1.1 Flow of Scanning................................................................................. 216<br />
4.1.2 Saving in Server (Specifying Job Template) ....................................... 216<br />
4.2 Printing Job Template List ................................................................................. 218<br />
Chapter 5 E-mail Scanning<br />
5.1 Scanning Document to Send as E-mail............................................................. 220<br />
5.1.1 Requirements...................................................................................... 220<br />
5.1.2 Scan and Mail ..................................................................................... 220<br />
5.1.3 Registering Dial Directory ................................................................... 223
Part 3 Appendix<br />
Appendix<br />
A Main Specifications............................................................................................ 232<br />
A.1 Product Specifications......................................................................... 232<br />
A.2 Printable Area ..................................................................................... 233<br />
A.3 Internal Fonts ...................................................................................... 234<br />
A.4 Interface Board (for Token Ring) ......................................................... 235<br />
B <strong>Printer</strong>/<strong>Scanner</strong> Settings (System Administration Mode)................................... 236<br />
C Precautions/Limitations...................................................................................... 237<br />
C.1 SMB .................................................................................................... 237<br />
C.2 TCP/IP (LPD) ...................................................................................... 239<br />
C.3 NetWare .............................................................................................. 241<br />
C.4 Scan Features..................................................................................... 244<br />
C.5 Print Auditron ...................................................................................... 245<br />
D Troubleshooting When Using SMB .................................................................... 246<br />
D.1 Cannot Find <strong>Printer</strong> ............................................................................. 246<br />
D.2 Cannot Print ........................................................................................ 247<br />
D.3 Cannot Delete Documents From <strong>Printer</strong> Window ............................... 247<br />
D.4 Cannot Auto Download <strong>Printer</strong> Driver ................................................. 248<br />
E Troubleshooting When Using TCP/IP ................................................................ 249<br />
E.1 For Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows Me ...................................... 249<br />
E.2 For Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP............................ 250<br />
F Troubleshooting When Using NetWare.............................................................. 251<br />
F.1 When Not Printed................................................................................ 251<br />
F.2 When “Switch off the power” Appears................................................. 254<br />
F.3 When Target Print Result Is Not Obtained .......................................... 254<br />
F.4 No Notification..................................................................................... 255<br />
G Troubleshooting forCentreWare Internet Services ............................................. 256<br />
H Automatic Gradation Adjustment ....................................................................... 257<br />
I Glossary ............................................................................................................ 258<br />
J Q & A ................................................................................................................. 260<br />
◆ Index.................................................................................................................................. 263<br />
vii
viii<br />
Related <strong>Guide</strong>s<br />
This section describes the guides provided for this machine.<br />
<strong>Guide</strong>s Supplied<br />
We provide the following guides for optimum usage of this machine.<br />
■<strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier)<br />
This guide describes all the necessary steps for copying, clearing paper jams,<br />
daily care, setting the various items, and safety information.<br />
■<strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (<strong>Printer</strong>/<strong>Scanner</strong>) (this guide)<br />
This guide describes all the necessary steps for printing and scanning, setting<br />
the network environment, setting the various items, and troubleshooting.<br />
■<strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Facsimile)<br />
This guide describes all the necessary steps for faxing and troubleshooting<br />
when faxing. This guide is provided with the DocumentCentre C400/320/240<br />
Series machine equipped with the fax function as well as with the optional<br />
Standard G3 Fax Kit.<br />
■ <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (PostScript ® Kit)<br />
This guide describes how to install and use the software that is included in the<br />
PostScript Driver Library. It is included with the PostScript kit.<br />
<strong>Guide</strong>s for Optional Accessories<br />
Optional accessories are also available for this machine. <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>s are provided<br />
with the optional accessories exclusively for the DocumentCentre C400/320/240<br />
Series. These <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>s are referred to as “guides for optional accessories”. <strong>Guide</strong>s<br />
for optional accessories are provided in two forms, printed or as On-line Help.<br />
<strong>Guide</strong>s for optional accessories describe all the necessary steps for operating optional<br />
accessories and installing software.
Using This <strong>Guide</strong><br />
This section describes the organization of this guide.<br />
This guide has been produced for people who operate the DocumentCentre C400/320/240<br />
Series machine equipped with the printer function on a regular daily basis. When reading<br />
this guide, read the chapter that is of particular relevance to the operation you are performing.<br />
What You Need to Know<br />
This guide assumes that the operator has a basic knowledge of the operating<br />
environment of the personal computer in use, networking environments, and<br />
how to operate a personal computer.<br />
For details about the environment of the personal computer in use, basic<br />
knowledge of networking environments, and how to operate a personal computer,<br />
refer to the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>s provided with the personal computer, operating<br />
system, and network system.<br />
Organization of This <strong>Guide</strong><br />
This guide consists of the following chapters:<br />
Part 1 <strong>Printer</strong><br />
Chapter 1 Setting <strong>Printer</strong> Environment<br />
This chapter describes how to set up this machine as a printer and use it as a<br />
network printer.<br />
Chapter 2 Setting up Network<br />
This chapter describes how to print with Windows network (SMB), TCP/IP<br />
(LPD), Internet Printing, and NetWare.<br />
Chapter 3 Basic Printing<br />
This chapter describes how to install the printer driver and do basic printing.<br />
Chapter 4 Special Printing<br />
This chapter describes how to do special printing like printing with special<br />
papers, adjusting colors.<br />
ix
x<br />
Chapter 5 Configuring From Computer (CentreWare Internet Services)<br />
This chapter describes how to use CentreWare Internet Services via a web<br />
browser to change or check printer settings when the machine is in TCP/IP<br />
environment.<br />
Part 2 <strong>Scanner</strong><br />
Chapter 1 Setting <strong>Scanner</strong> Environment<br />
This chapter describes how to set up the machine as a scanner, the environment<br />
to be used and how to install the Network <strong>Scanner</strong> Utility.<br />
Chapter 2 Documents for Scanning<br />
This chapter describes how to load documents and some special documents<br />
to note when using this machine as a scanner.<br />
Chapter 3 Scanning With Mailbox<br />
This chapter describes how to scan when using the mailbox.<br />
Chapter 4 Scanning With Job Template<br />
This chapter describes how to scan when using Job Template.<br />
Chapter 5 E-mail Scanning<br />
This chapter describes how to do e-mail scanning when using the optional Email<br />
Scanning feature.<br />
Part 3 Appendix<br />
Appendix<br />
This appendix describes items like the main specifications, precautions/limitations,<br />
troubleshooting, Automatic Gradation Adjustment.
Conventions<br />
1 In this guide, host machine refers to a personal computer or workstation and<br />
“DocumentCentre C400/320/240” refers to “<strong>Fuji</strong> <strong>Xerox</strong> DocumentCentre C400/<br />
320/240”.<br />
2 The following icons are used in this guide.<br />
3<br />
Indicates important information and must be read in detail.<br />
Indicates supplementary information.<br />
Indicates references used in this guide. <strong>Guide</strong> titles are noted without double<br />
quotes while specific sections like “1.9.2 Disabling the Power Saver Mode”<br />
are found within double quotes.<br />
Special marks/characters used in this guide.<br />
“ ” : Double quotes indicate the following:<br />
●Messages that appear in the touch panel display and computer<br />
screens.<br />
● Characters to be entered.<br />
●Feature names or buttons that are difficult to understand.<br />
Bold face : Bold face characters refer to selections made like options on the<br />
screen, hard or soft buttons, and keys from the keyboard.<br />
For example: Press ESC.<br />
4 When a checkbox is checked, it indicates ON, otherwise it indicates OFF.<br />
5<br />
The item with the radio button checked is the selected item.<br />
xi
xii<br />
Safety Notes<br />
Read this section carefully before using the DocumentCentre 400/320/240 Series to ensure<br />
that you operate your machine safely.<br />
Also, refer to the “Safety Notes” section of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier).<br />
This section explains the graphic symbols used in this guide.<br />
is used to alert operators to an operating procedure, practice or<br />
condition that, if not strictly observed, may result in severe injury<br />
or loss of life.<br />
is used to alert operators to an operating procedure, practice or<br />
condition that, if not strictly observed, may result in safety<br />
hazards to personnel or damage to the equipment.<br />
This symbol is used to alert operators to a<br />
specific operating procedure that requires close<br />
attention. Read and follow instructions carefully<br />
to ensure the task is accomplished safely.<br />
This symbol is used to alert operators to a<br />
specific operating procedure that must not be<br />
performed. Read instructions carefully and do<br />
not perform any procedures that are prohibited.<br />
This symbol is used to alert operators to a<br />
specific operating procedure that must be<br />
emphasized in order to operate the machine<br />
safely. Read and follow instructions carefully.<br />
Power and Earth Connections<br />
Switch off the machine and the computer before connecting the interface cable. Connecting<br />
the cable or cord with a live machine and computer can cause electric shocks.
Switching Off<br />
Others<br />
● When the power is switched off, print data remaining in the machine and information<br />
spooled in the memory will be erased.<br />
Before switching off the power during normal operation, ensure that the processing<br />
of data stored in the memory is done.<br />
Also, ensure that the touch panel display is completely blank before switching on<br />
the power again.<br />
● If the power is switched on and off continuously, you might not be able to start or<br />
stop the machine properly. If you cannot stop the machine properly, pull out the<br />
electric cord before inserting it again and switching on the power.<br />
xiii
Part 1 <strong>Printer</strong>
1Setting <strong>Printer</strong><br />
Environment<br />
1.1 <strong>Printer</strong> Environments ......................................................................... 4<br />
1.1.1 As Local <strong>Printer</strong> .................................................................. 4<br />
1.1.2 As Network <strong>Printer</strong>.............................................................. 5<br />
1.2 Connecting Interface Cable.............................................................. 10<br />
1.2.1 Connecting by Parallel Interface ....................................... 10<br />
1.2.2 Connecting by Ethernet Interface ..................................... 11<br />
1.2.3 Connecting by Token Ring Interface ................................. 11<br />
1.3 Setting IP Address ........................................................................... 13<br />
1.3.1 Setting IP Address............................................................ 14<br />
1.4 Setting Port ...................................................................................... 18<br />
1.4.1 Activating Port................................................................... 18<br />
1.5 Memory Allocation ........................................................................... 22
Setting <strong>Printer</strong> Environment 4<br />
1<br />
1.1<br />
<strong>Printer</strong> Environments<br />
This section describes the different printer environments that can be set up for this machine.<br />
When connected to a computer directly, this machine can be used as a local printer.<br />
When connected to a network, this machine can be used as a network printer. As this<br />
machine supports multi-protocol, it can be shared among different network environments.<br />
1.1.1 As Local <strong>Printer</strong><br />
Using parallel interface<br />
Connects this machine to a computer by parallel interface for printing.<br />
Use only parallel interface cables provided by our company. Using parallel interface cables from<br />
other company may lead to electric wave obstruction.
1.1.2 As Network <strong>Printer</strong><br />
Windows network (SMB)<br />
1.1 <strong>Printer</strong> Environments<br />
Server Message Block (SMB) is a protocol for sharing file or printer on Windows<br />
95, Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, and Windows<br />
XP. Using SMB, print data or settings can be sent directly to a printer on the<br />
same network (Ethernet interface) without going through a server.<br />
You can begin printing by activating the SMB port, and then registering the<br />
printer on the network on each of the Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows Me,<br />
Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, and Windows XP operating system (OS).<br />
Depending on the network environment, you may need to set up IP address,<br />
subnet mask and gateway address for the printer. Consult your network administrator<br />
for details on setting the needed item.<br />
“2.1 Windows Network (SMB)” (P. 26) for details on the settings.<br />
Setting <strong>Printer</strong> Environment 1<br />
5
Setting <strong>Printer</strong> Environment 1<br />
6<br />
1.1 <strong>Printer</strong> Environments<br />
TCP/IP (LPD)<br />
This machine supports TCP/IP (LPD). The following describes the different connections<br />
in brief:<br />
■For Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows Me<br />
Using our TCP/IP Direct Print Utility, print data can be sent directly to a printer on<br />
the same network (Ethernet interface) without going through a server. TCP/IP<br />
Direct Print Utility is installed together with the printer driver.<br />
You will need to set up the IP address on the printer and the Windows 95,<br />
Windows 98, Windows Me computer.<br />
“2.2 TCP/IP (LPD)” (P. 28) for details on the settings.<br />
■For Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, Mac OS X<br />
Using the LPR port for the OS, print data can be sent directly for printing. You will<br />
need to set up the IP address on the printer and the Windows NT 4.0, Windows<br />
2000, Windows XP, Mac OS X computer. Once the printer has registered on<br />
Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, Mac OS X computer is shared,<br />
you can send data from Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows Me machine with<br />
shared printer for printing.<br />
“2.2 TCP/IP (LPD)” (P. 28) for details on the settings.
Internet printing<br />
1.1 <strong>Printer</strong> Environments<br />
This machine supports Internet Printing Protocol (IPP). As Windows 2000,<br />
Windows XP, Windows Me is installed with the client software (IPP port monitor)<br />
needed to print to a printer supporting IPP, you can specify the printer from the<br />
Add <strong>Printer</strong> Wizard. Using IPP, you can print to a remote printer through the<br />
Internet or intranet.<br />
NetWare<br />
“2.3 Using Internet Printing” (P. 30) for details on the settings.<br />
This machine can be used as a network OS in environment using Novell Net-<br />
Ware.<br />
“2.4 NetWare” (P. 32) for details on the settings.<br />
Setting <strong>Printer</strong> Environment 1<br />
7
Setting <strong>Printer</strong> Environment 1<br />
8<br />
1.1 <strong>Printer</strong> Environments<br />
EtherTalk (option)<br />
As this machine supports EtherTalk protocol, you can print from Macintosh.<br />
To print from Macintosh, you will need the PostScript Software Kit (option). See the PostScript Software<br />
Kit guide for details for using it.
Token Ring (option)<br />
1.1 <strong>Printer</strong> Environments<br />
This machine supports Token Ring. When installed with the optional interface<br />
board for Token Ring, you can use the printer in a network environment with Net-<br />
Ware or TCP/IP existing itself or together.<br />
When the interface board for Token Ring is installed, the Ethernet interface cannot be used. Also, the<br />
items which can be set will be different. See “2.4 NetWare” (P. 32) for details on the settings.<br />
Setting <strong>Printer</strong> Environment 1<br />
9
Setting <strong>Printer</strong> Environment 10<br />
1<br />
1.2<br />
Connecting Interface<br />
Cable<br />
Use the parallel interface to connect this machine to a host device directly. Use an Ethernet<br />
interface to connect to a network. You can also use the Token Ring (option) to make a connection.<br />
1.2.1 Connecting by Parallel Interface<br />
Procedure<br />
The following procedure describes how to connect with the parallel interface.<br />
To connect to a host device using parallel interface, you will need the parallel interface cable provided<br />
by our company as an optional product. For details on this optional product, see “Appendix B<br />
Optional Accessories” in “Part 3 Appendix” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier).<br />
1 Insert the interface cable connector to<br />
the parallel interface connector of this<br />
machine and secure it by the wire clips<br />
on both sides.<br />
2 Connect the other end of the interface<br />
cable connector to the host device.<br />
3 Turn on the power of the host device.<br />
4 Turn on the power of the machine.<br />
If necessary, you may select the following settings:<br />
● Port Status (Default: Enabled)<br />
● Print Mode (Default: Auto)<br />
● PJL (Default: Enabled)<br />
● Auto Eject Time (Default: 30 Seconds)<br />
● Adobe Communication Protocol (Default: Standard)<br />
● Bi-directional Communication (Default: Enabled)<br />
For details on the items to be set, see “5.6 Network Settings” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong><br />
(Copier).<br />
● Adobe Communication Protocol can be set when the PostScript Software Kit (option) has been<br />
installed.
1.2 Connecting Interface Cable<br />
● Except for Bi-directional Communication, there is no need to change the default setting of the other<br />
items for normal use. However, it might be necessary to make changes depending on the OS of each<br />
host device.<br />
1.2.2 Connecting by Ethernet Interface<br />
Procedure<br />
The types of Ethernet interface supported are as follows:<br />
● 100Base-TX<br />
● 10Base-T<br />
By default, 100Base-TX and 10Base-T will be automatically interchanged.<br />
The following procedure describes how to connect with the Ethernet interface.<br />
1 Connect the interface cable to the<br />
Ethernet interface connector.<br />
Use only interface cable meant for the network connection<br />
in use. To replace network cable, contact our Customer<br />
Support Center.<br />
2 Turn on the power of the machine.<br />
1.2.3 Connecting by Token Ring Interface<br />
The types of Token Ring interface supported are as follows:<br />
● UTP<br />
● STP<br />
When the Token Ring interface board is installed, the Ethernet interface cannot be used.<br />
● To set up the Token Ring, you will need the Token Ring Installation kit besides the Token Ring<br />
interface board. The Token Ring Installation kit will be installed by our customer engineer. For<br />
more details, please contact our Customer Support Center.<br />
● When the Token Ring interface port is installed, the MAC address will be changed.<br />
● When using gateway in Token Ring environment, set Source Routing to On.<br />
Setting <strong>Printer</strong> Environment 1<br />
11
Setting <strong>Printer</strong> Environment 1<br />
12<br />
1.2 Connecting Interface Cable<br />
Procedure<br />
The following procedure describes how to connect by the Token Ring interface.<br />
1 Connect the Token Ring interface cable<br />
to the Token Ring interface connector.<br />
Do not connect the interface cable to the two Token Ring<br />
interface port connectors. This may cause poor transmission<br />
or breakdown.<br />
Use only interface cable meant for the network connection<br />
in use.<br />
2 Turn on the power of the machine.<br />
If necessary, set the following items on the printer control panel (Network/Port>):<br />
● IPX/SPX FrameType (Default: Auto)<br />
● Token Ring - Transmit Rate (Default: Auto)<br />
● Token Ring - Max Packet Size (Default: 1,500 Octet)<br />
● Token Ring - Source Routing (Default: Off)<br />
For normal use, there is no need to change the default settings of all the items.
1.3<br />
Setting IP Address<br />
This section describes how to set the IP address.<br />
Depending on the network environment, you may need to set the subnet mask and gateway<br />
address for the machine. If your network environment has a Reverse ARP Protocol (RARP),<br />
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) or BOOTP environment, you may obtain the<br />
address automatically from each of these servers.<br />
By default, these items will be obtained automatically from the DHCP server.<br />
To check if the address has been obtained from the DHCP, RARP or BOOTP servers, either<br />
carry out the procedure in “1.3.1 Setting IP Address” (P. 14) and then check the settings of<br />
the IP address, subnet mask and gateway address; or see “6.6 Printing Reports/Lists” in<br />
“Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier) to print out the System Settings List and then<br />
under TCP/IP in Communication Settings, check the IP address, subnet mask and gateway<br />
address.<br />
If the address has not been obtained automatically or to set the settings manually, see<br />
“1.3.1 Setting IP Address” (P. 14) for details for setting the address. You may also change<br />
the way to obtain the address.<br />
● Use the DHCP server together with the Windows Internet Name Service (WINS) server. Check with your system<br />
administrator for any queries on the DHCP, WINS environments.<br />
● When using the BOOTP server, change Get IP Address to BOOTP. For details on the way to change, see “5.6<br />
Network Settings” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier). Check with your system administrator for<br />
any queries on the BOOTP environment.<br />
You may set the method of obtaining an address by using either the System Administration<br />
Mode through the touch panel display or the CentreWare Internet Services.<br />
● For details on System Administration Mode, see “Chapter 5 System Administration Mode Settings” in “Part 1<br />
Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier).<br />
● For details on CentreWare Internet Services, see “Chapter 5 Configuring From Computer (CentreWare Internet<br />
Services)” (P. 105).<br />
Setting <strong>Printer</strong> Environment 13<br />
1
Setting <strong>Printer</strong> Environment 1<br />
14<br />
1.3 Setting IP Address<br />
1.3.1 Setting IP Address<br />
Procedure<br />
The following procedure describes how to set the IP address using the touch<br />
panel display.<br />
1 On the control panel, press Password/System Settings.<br />
Either the System Administrator Menu screen or System Administrator – Password Entry screen will<br />
be displayed.<br />
If the System Administrator Menu screen is displayed, proceed to step 2.<br />
System Administrator Menu<br />
If the System Administrator – Password Entry screen is displayed, see “5.2.1 Entering the System<br />
Administration Mode” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier) for details on entering the<br />
password.<br />
<br />
2 On the screen, select System Settings.<br />
System Administrator Menu<br />
The System Settings screen is displayed.<br />
<strong>User</strong> Mode System Settings<br />
<br />
<br />
<strong>User</strong> Mode System Settings
3 Select System Settings.<br />
System Settings<br />
System Settings<br />
Auditron<br />
Administration<br />
The System Settings screen is displayed.<br />
4 Select Network Settings.<br />
System Settings<br />
The Network Settings screen is displayed.<br />
5 Select Protocol Settings.<br />
Setup Menu<br />
The Protocol Settings screen is displayed.<br />
Close<br />
System Administrator<br />
Password<br />
Close<br />
Common Settings Copy Mode Settings Network Settings<br />
Print Mode Settings<br />
<br />
Scan Mode Settings<br />
<br />
<br />
1.3 Setting IP Address<br />
Setting <strong>Printer</strong> Environment 1<br />
15
Setting <strong>Printer</strong> Environment 1<br />
16<br />
1.3 Setting IP Address<br />
6 Select TCP/IP - Get IP Address and then Change Settings.<br />
The display of Current Settings of TCP/IP - IP Address, TCP/IP - Subnet Mask, TCP/IP - Gateway<br />
Address might differ according to your network environment used.<br />
Protocol Settings<br />
Items Current Settings<br />
1. Token Ring - Transmit Rate Auto<br />
2. Token Ring -Max Packet Size 1500 Octet<br />
3. Token Ring - Source Routing Off<br />
4. TCP/IP - Get IP Address DHCP<br />
5. TCP/IP - IP Address DHCP in Progress<br />
The TCP/IP - Get IP Address screen is displayed.<br />
7 Select Manual and then Save.<br />
When obtaining address from the BOOTP server, select the BOOTP Server button, followed by the<br />
Save button and then proceed to step 12.<br />
2. TCP/IP - Get IP Address<br />
DHCP<br />
BOOTP<br />
RARP<br />
Manual<br />
The Protocol Settings screen is displayed.<br />
8 Select TCP/IP - IP Address and then Change Settings.<br />
Protocol Settings<br />
Items Current Settings<br />
1. Token Ring - Transmit Rate Auto<br />
2. Token Ring -Max Packet Size 1500 Octet<br />
3. Token Ring - Source Routing Off<br />
4. TCP/IP - Get IP Address Manual<br />
5. TCP/IP - IP Address<br />
(Not Set)<br />
The TCP/IP - IP Address screen is displayed.<br />
1/2<br />
Cancel<br />
Close<br />
Change<br />
Settings<br />
Save<br />
IP Address, Subnet Mask and Gateway Address will<br />
be automatically extracted from the DHCP Server.<br />
Extraction begins when the Exit button is selected.<br />
1/2<br />
Close<br />
Change<br />
Settings
1.3 Setting IP Address<br />
9 Enter the IP address using the numeric keypad.<br />
Once three digits are entered, the cursor will move automatically to a next bit. To move to the next bit<br />
before three digits are entered, select the Next button.<br />
● Enter the address in a xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx format. xxx refer to the value between 0 to 255. However, the<br />
following address cannot be entered: 224 to 225.xxx.xxx.xxx and 127.xxx.xxx.xxx.<br />
● To correct a invalid entered value, press the C button on the control panel, and then re-enter.<br />
5. TCP/IP - IP Address<br />
. . .<br />
10 Select Save once you have entered the IP address.<br />
The Protocol Settings screen is displayed.<br />
11 If necessary, repeat steps 8 to 10 to set the subnet mask and gateway<br />
address.<br />
● The subnet mask and gateway address cannot be set if the IP address has not been entered.<br />
● Enter the IP address in a xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx format.<br />
● Enter the subnet mask using a combination of the following values: 0, 128, 192, 224, 248, 252, 255.<br />
However, 0 cannot be entered as one of the middle bits.<br />
● Enter the gateway address within the limit of 0 to 255. However, the following address cannot be<br />
entered: 224 to 225.xxx.xxx.xxx and 127.xxx.xxx.xxx.<br />
● When the gateway adress does not need to be set, enter “0.0.0.0”.<br />
12 Once you have entered the IP address, select Close repeatedly until<br />
the System Settings screen is displayed.<br />
13 Select Close.<br />
The machine will reboot and the display will return to the previous screen prior to this procedure.<br />
Next<br />
Cancel<br />
Save<br />
Setting <strong>Printer</strong> Environment 1<br />
17
Setting <strong>Printer</strong> Environment 18<br />
1<br />
1.4<br />
Setting Port<br />
This section describes the procedure on activating the port to be used for printing after the<br />
IP address has been set or checked.<br />
You can activate the port by using either the System Administration Mode through the touch<br />
panel display or CentreWare Internet Services.<br />
If the port has been used already in the Enabled state, the procedure in this section is not<br />
necessary. If the needed port is in the Disabled state, carry out the procedure.<br />
To check if the port is Enabled, either carry out the following procedure in “1.4.1 Activating<br />
Port” and then check the port status; or see “6.6 Printing Reports/Lists” in “Part 1 Hardware”<br />
of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier) to print out the System Settings List and then check the item<br />
under Communication Settings.<br />
● “Chapter 5 System Administration Mode Settings” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier) for details<br />
on System Administration Mode and the ports that can be set.<br />
● “Chapter 5 Configuring From Computer (CentreWare Internet Services)” (P. 105) for details on CentreWare<br />
Internet Services.<br />
1.4.1 Activating Port<br />
Procedure<br />
The following procedure describes how to set the LPD port to Enabled (default:<br />
Disabled) using the touch panel display.<br />
1 On the control panel, press Password/System Settings.<br />
Either the System Administrator Menu screen or System Administrator – Password Entry screen will<br />
be displayed.<br />
If the System Administrator Menu screen is displayed, proceed to step 2.<br />
System Administrator Menu<br />
<strong>User</strong> Mode System Settings
1.4 Setting Port<br />
If the System Administrator – Password Entry screen is displayed, see “5.2.1 Entering the System<br />
Administration Mode” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier) for details on entering the<br />
password.<br />
<br />
2 On the screen, select System Settings.<br />
System Administrator Menu<br />
The System Settings screen is displayed.<br />
3 Select System Settings.<br />
System Settings<br />
System Settings<br />
Auditron<br />
Administration<br />
<br />
The System Settings screen is displayed.<br />
4 Select Network Settings.<br />
System Settings<br />
The Network Settings screen is displayed.<br />
<br />
<strong>User</strong> Mode System Settings<br />
Setup Menu<br />
<br />
Close<br />
System Administrator<br />
Password<br />
Close<br />
Common Settings Copy Mode Settings Network Settings<br />
Print Mode Settings<br />
Scan Mode Settings<br />
Setting <strong>Printer</strong> Environment 1<br />
19
Setting <strong>Printer</strong> Environment 1<br />
20<br />
1.4 Setting Port<br />
5 Select Port Settings.<br />
<br />
<br />
The Port Settings screen is displayed.<br />
6 Check Current Settings for LPD.<br />
If it is Enabled, there is no need to do any setting.<br />
If it is Disabled, carry out the setting. If it is Enabled, proceed to step 12.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
For the remaining steps, LPD is assumed to be Disabled in this example.<br />
7 Select LPD and then Change Settings.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
The LPD screen is displayed.<br />
8 Select Port Status and then Change Settings.<br />
LPD<br />
Items Current Settings<br />
1. Port Status Disabled<br />
The LPD - Port Status screen is displayed.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
Close<br />
Change<br />
Settings
9 Select Enable and then Save.<br />
1. LPD - Port Status<br />
Disable<br />
Enable<br />
The LPD screen is displayed.<br />
1.4 Setting Port<br />
To activate the LPD port, the IP address must be set. If the IP address has not been set, selecting the<br />
Enable button will display the TCP/IP - Get IP Address screen. For details on setting the IP address,<br />
see “1.3 Setting IP Address” (P. 13).<br />
10 Check that Current Settings for Port Status is Enabled and then select<br />
Close.<br />
LPD<br />
Items Current Settings<br />
1. Port Status Enabled<br />
The Port Settings screen is displayed.<br />
Cancel<br />
11 Repeat steps 6 to 9 to set SNMP to Enabled.<br />
If there are other ports needed for printing, repeat steps 7 to 10 to set their status to Enabled.<br />
12 Select Close repeatedly until the System Settings screen is displayed.<br />
13 Select Close.<br />
The machine will reboot and the display will return to the previous screen prior to this procedure.<br />
Save<br />
Close<br />
Change<br />
Settings<br />
Setting <strong>Printer</strong> Environment 1<br />
21
Setting <strong>Printer</strong> Environment 22<br />
1<br />
1.5<br />
Memory Allocation<br />
This section describes how to allocate memory.<br />
Depending on the use, you can allocate memory in this machine according to the memory<br />
types in the table. The memory types that can be allocated may be different according to the<br />
optional products installed.<br />
Print page buffer<br />
PCL memory<br />
*PS :with PostScript Software Kit installed<br />
Except for print page buffer, memory allocation of the other memory types can be done<br />
either through the touch panel display or CentreWare Internet Services. Memory allocation<br />
will change when power is on or system is reset.<br />
● “5.7.1 Allocate Memory” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier) for details on the capacity of each<br />
memory type, spool default values and the way of setting.<br />
● “Chapter 5 Configuring From Computer (CentreWare Internet Services)” (P. 105) for details on CentreWare<br />
Internet Services.<br />
Print page buffer<br />
Memory Types Standard PS*<br />
PostScript memory ×<br />
Receive buffer<br />
This is the area for drawing the actual print image. The area to be allocated to<br />
print page buffer will be the remaining area after all other memory types have<br />
been allocated. As such, the capacity of print page buffer cannot be changed<br />
directly. The actual capacity allocated for print page buffer can be checked under<br />
Memory of the System Settings List. You can also use CentreWare Internet Services<br />
to check.<br />
To print high-resolution document, configure your settings to increase the capacity<br />
of the print page buffer.<br />
● “6.6 Printing Reports/Lists” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier) for details on printing<br />
the System Settings List.<br />
● “Chapter 5 Configuring From Computer (CentreWare Internet Services)” (P. 105) for details on<br />
CentreWare Internet Services.<br />
When using the Page Print Mode of the PCL printer driver, you need to install at least 192 Mbyte of<br />
memory. See the on-line Help file for details on Print Page Mode.
PCL memory<br />
1.5 Memory Allocation<br />
This specifies the memory capacity to be used for the PCL5e. This memory is to<br />
store the interim data for creating the print image. By increasing the memory<br />
capacity, the printing speed may also be increased.<br />
PostScript memory<br />
This specifies the memory capacity to be used for PostScript. This item is displayed<br />
when the PostScript Software Kit (option) has been installed.<br />
Receive buffer<br />
This is the area for temporarily storing data received from the computer. A<br />
receive buffer is prepared for each port to enable receiving of data from multiple<br />
ports at the same time. The types of receive buffer are as follows:<br />
● Receive Buffer - Parallel<br />
● Receive Buffer - LPD Spool<br />
● Receive Buffer - NetWare<br />
● Receive Buffer - SMB Spool<br />
● Receive Buffer - IPP Spool<br />
● Receive Buffer - EtherTalk<br />
● Receive Buffer - Port 9100<br />
If the capacity of the receive buffer is increased, the processing of printing might<br />
be faster. Adjust the buffer capacity according to the print data volume. For ports<br />
that are not in use, it is recommended to disable them and allocate their memory<br />
for other uses.<br />
For LPD/SMB/IPP, you can specify spool processing. The default values are Off.<br />
The types of spool include Memory and Hard Disk. When Memory has been set,<br />
data exceeding the allocated capacity cannot be received. When this occurs, set<br />
it to Hard Disk.<br />
● To set EtherTalk, you will need the PostScript Software Kit (option).<br />
● For IPP, Memory cannot be set.<br />
■Setting Spool<br />
Spool mode<br />
This is the mode to save print data output from application program to the spool<br />
file in this machine temporarily for print processing. The spool file destination<br />
can be selected from the memory inside the machine or the internal hard disk.<br />
As the print data that has been spooled is processed in this machine, they will<br />
be released quickly by the application program. Processing from multiple computers<br />
can be done at the same time.<br />
Setting <strong>Printer</strong> Environment 1<br />
23
Setting <strong>Printer</strong> Environment 1<br />
24<br />
1.5 Memory Allocation<br />
Non-spool mode<br />
This is the mode used to receive and process print data output from application<br />
program in this machine. If the machine is processing a print request from a<br />
computer, print request from other computers cannot be received.
2Setting up Network<br />
2.1 Windows Network (SMB) ................................................................. 26<br />
2.1.1 System Structure .............................................................. 26<br />
2.1.2 Setting Procedure............................................................. 27<br />
2.2 TCP/IP (LPD) ................................................................................... 28<br />
2.2.1 System Structure .............................................................. 28<br />
2.2.2 Setting Procedure............................................................. 29<br />
2.3 Using Internet Printing ..................................................................... 30<br />
2.3.1 System Structure .............................................................. 30<br />
2.3.2 Setting Procedure............................................................. 31<br />
2.4 NetWare ........................................................................................... 32<br />
2.4.1 System Structure .............................................................. 32<br />
2.4.2 Interface............................................................................ 32<br />
2.4.3 Setting Procedure............................................................. 33
Setting up Network<br />
2<br />
26<br />
2.1<br />
Windows Network (SMB)<br />
This section describes how to connect this machine to a Windows network using SMB.<br />
2.1.1 System Structure<br />
SMB is a protocol for sharing file or printer on Windows 95, Windows 98,<br />
Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, and Windows XP. Using SMB,<br />
print data or settings can be sent directly to a printer on the same network (Ethernet<br />
interface) without going through a server.<br />
You can begin printing by activating the SMB port on the machine, and then registering<br />
the printer on the network on each of the Windows 95, Windows 98,<br />
Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, and Windows XP OS.<br />
Depending on the network environment, you may need to set IP address, subnet<br />
mask and gateway address for the machine. Consult your network administrator<br />
for details on setting the needed item.<br />
● “1.3 Setting IP Address” (P. 13) for details on setting IP address.<br />
● The receiving of printing by IP address can be limited. For details, see “5.7 Print Mode Settings”<br />
in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier).
2.1.2 Setting Procedure<br />
Procedure<br />
The procedure is as follows:<br />
2.1 Windows Network (SMB)<br />
1 Configuring this machine:<br />
Using either the touch panel display or CentreWare Internet Services, set the<br />
port for SMB to Enabled (default: Disabled).<br />
● “1.4 Setting Port” (P. 18) for details on setting the port.<br />
● More detailed settings can be done by using CentreWare Internet Services. For details, see<br />
“Chapter 5 Configuring From Computer (CentreWare Internet Services)” (P. 105).<br />
● By overwriting the config.txt files of this machine, the setting/changing of SMB can be done on the<br />
Windows computer.<br />
2 Configuring the computer:<br />
Install the printer driver.<br />
● When using NetBEUI as the transport protocol, check that the NetBEUI protocol has been installed<br />
on the host device. If not installed, see the manual of the OS used to install it.<br />
● When using TCP/IP as the transport protocol, check that the TCP/IP protocol has been installed on<br />
the host device. If not installed, see the manual of the OS used to install it. IP address is needed on<br />
both the host device and this machine.<br />
“3.4 Installing/Uninstalling the <strong>Printer</strong> Drivers” (P. 50) for details on how to install the printer<br />
driver.<br />
Setting up Network<br />
2<br />
27
Setting up Network<br />
2<br />
28<br />
2.2<br />
TCP/IP (LPD)<br />
This section describes how to connect the machine to Windows computer using TCP/IP<br />
(LPD).<br />
2.2.1 System Structure<br />
This machine supports TCP/IP (LPD). The following describes the different connections<br />
in brief:<br />
■For Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows Me<br />
Using our TCP/IP Direct Print Utility, print data can be sent directly to a printer on<br />
the same network (Ethernet interface) for printing without going through a server.<br />
TCP/IP Direct Print Utility is installed together with the printer driver.<br />
You will need to set the IP address on the machine and the Windows 95, Windows<br />
98, Windows Me computer.<br />
■For Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, Mac OS X<br />
Print data can be sent directly and printed using the standard LPR port for OS<br />
(standard TCP/IP port for Windows 2000). You will need to set the IP address on<br />
the machine and the Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, Mac OS X<br />
computer.<br />
Once the machine registered on Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP,<br />
Mac OS X computer is shared, you can also send data from Windows 95, Windows<br />
98, Windows Me machine to the shared machine for printing.<br />
The receiving of printing by IP address can be limited. For details, see “5.7 Print Mode Settings” in<br />
“Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier).
2.2.2 Setting Procedure<br />
Procedure<br />
The procedure is as follows:<br />
2.2 TCP/IP (LPD)<br />
1 Configuring this machine:<br />
Using either the touch panel display or CentreWare Internet Services, set the IP<br />
address and set the port for LPD to Enabled (default: Disabled).<br />
● “1.3 Setting IP Address” (P. 13) for details on setting IP address.<br />
● “1.4 Setting Port” (P. 18) for details on setting the port.<br />
● More detailed settings can be done by using CentreWare Internet Services. For details, see<br />
“Chapter 5 Configuring From Computer (CentreWare Internet Services)” (P. 105).<br />
2 Configuring the computer:<br />
Install the printer driver.<br />
Before installing the printer driver, check the following items:<br />
■For Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows Me<br />
Is TCP/IP protocol installed? If not installed, see the manual of the OS used to install it.<br />
■For Windows NT 4.0<br />
Is TCP/IP protocol and Microsoft TCP/IP printing installed? If not installed, see the manual of<br />
Windows NT 4.0 to install it.<br />
■For Windows 2000, Windows XP<br />
Is Internet protocol (TCP/IP) installed? If not installed, see the manual of the OS used to install it.<br />
For details on how to install the printer driver, see“3.4 Installing/Uninstalling the <strong>Printer</strong> Drivers”<br />
(P. 50) for windows or see the PostScript software kit guide for Macintosh.<br />
Setting up Network<br />
2<br />
29
Setting up Network<br />
2<br />
30<br />
2.3<br />
Using Internet Printing<br />
This section describes how to use Internet printing from Windows 2000, Windows XP or<br />
Windows Me through Internet Printing Protocol (IPP).<br />
2.3.1 System Structure<br />
This machine supports IPP. As Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Me is<br />
installed with the client software (IPP port monitor) needed to print to a printer<br />
supporting IPP, you can specify the printer from the Add <strong>Printer</strong> Wizard. Using<br />
IPP, you can print to a remote printer through the Internet or intranet.<br />
You will need to set the IP address on the machine and the Windows Me, Windows<br />
2000, Windows XP computer.<br />
To use Internet printing on Windows Me, the IPP port must be installed. For details on installing the<br />
IPP port, see the manual of Windows Me.<br />
● Transport protocol<br />
TCP/IP<br />
● Target OS<br />
Microsoft Windows 2000 Server (with Service Pack 2)<br />
Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional (with Service Pack 2)<br />
Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition<br />
Microsoft Windows XP Professional Edition<br />
Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition
2.3.2 Setting Procedure<br />
Procedure<br />
The procedure is as follows:<br />
2.3 Using Internet Printing<br />
1 Configuring this machine:<br />
Using either the touch panel display or CentreWare Internet Services, set the IP<br />
address and the port for IPP to Enabled (default: Disabled).<br />
● “1.3 Setting IP Address” (P. 13) for details on setting IP address.<br />
● “1.4 Setting Port” (P. 18) for details on setting the port.<br />
● More detailed settings can be done by using CentreWare Internet Services. For details, see<br />
“Chapter 5 Configuring From Computer (CentreWare Internet Services)” (P. 105).<br />
2 Configuring the computer:<br />
Set the print destination and install the printer driver.<br />
The Network Print Environment <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Network.pdf) in the PCL Driver/Network Utility<br />
(Windows ® ) CD-ROM for details.<br />
Setting up Network<br />
2<br />
31
Setting up Network<br />
2<br />
32<br />
2.4 NetWare<br />
This section describes how to connect the machine to a Novell NetWare-network.<br />
2.4.1 System Structure<br />
The system structure is as follows:<br />
As a network OS, this machine supports Novell NetWare (version 5.x, 6.x) and<br />
the printer server (PServer) mode only using binary and NDS.<br />
In the PServer mode, this machine will be the print server and will print jobs from<br />
the print queue. The created printer will use up one user license of the file server.<br />
You can print from the machine in an NDPS environment by using Novell NDPS Gateway. Before you<br />
start printing, set the machine to operate in a NetWare print environment, or start LPD. You need to<br />
set them as the Gateway destination when you set up the Novell NDPS Gateway. However, the<br />
attributes that can be acquired and set in NDPS are not supported.<br />
2.4.2 Interface<br />
■Supported interface<br />
● 100Base-TX<br />
● 10Base-T<br />
■Supported frame type<br />
● Ethernet II<br />
● IEEE802.3<br />
● IEEE802.3/IEEE802.2<br />
● IEEE802.3/IEEE802.2/SNAP<br />
This machine will send out packet of each frame type on the connected network,<br />
and automatically activate to the frame type that responded first.<br />
However, if other protocol exists together on the same network, use Ethernet II.
2.4 NetWare<br />
The network system kit (e.g. HUB) may not match the automatic setting of the frame type. If the data<br />
link indicator of the network system kit connected to this machine is not lighted, change the frame type<br />
setting of this machine to match the frame type of the file server. Use CentreWare Internet Services to<br />
do the setting and see “Chapter 5 Configuring From Computer (CentreWare Internet Services)”<br />
(P. 105) for details.<br />
2.4.3 Setting Procedure<br />
Procedure<br />
The following procedure describes how to set up this machine by PServer mode<br />
to the network environment using NetWare.<br />
1 Checking host device name and network address:<br />
By referring to “6.6 Printing Reports/Lists” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong><br />
(Copier), print out the System Settings List and check the host device name and<br />
network address printed under the NetWare item.<br />
2 Configuring this machine:<br />
Set the NetWare port to Enabled on this machine beforehand.<br />
The Network Print Environment <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Network.pdf) in the PCL Driver/Network Utility<br />
(Windows ® ) CD-ROM for details.<br />
3 Configuring the computer:<br />
Install the printer driver supported by this machine to the computer. The printer<br />
driver varies according to the OS used.<br />
For the host device, use a personal computer that can function as a NetWare host device.<br />
The Network Print Environment <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Network.pdf) in the PCL Driver/Network Utility<br />
(Windows ® ) CD-ROM for details.<br />
Setting up Network<br />
2<br />
33
3Basic Printing<br />
3.1 Flow of Printing (Windows) .............................................................. 36<br />
3.2 About Paper ..................................................................................... 37<br />
3.2.1 Difference From Copying .................................................. 37<br />
3.2.2 Caution for Printing ........................................................... 37<br />
3.2.3 Paper Supply .................................................................... 38<br />
3.2.4 Outputting Paper............................................................... 39<br />
3.2.5 Loading Paper in Trays 1 to 4 ........................................... 39<br />
3.2.6 Loading Paper in Tray 5 (Bypass Tray) ............................. 40<br />
3.2.7 Changing Paper Size of Paper Tray.................................. 45<br />
3.3 Printing Features.............................................................................. 46<br />
3.3.1 Before Printing .................................................................. 46<br />
3.3.2 Printing Procedure............................................................ 46<br />
3.3.3 Setting Printing Features .................................................. 47<br />
3.3.4 Using On-line Help............................................................ 49<br />
3.4 Installing/Uninstalling the <strong>Printer</strong> Drivers ......................................... 50<br />
3.4.1 For a Local <strong>Printer</strong> ............................................................ 50<br />
3.4.2 For a Network <strong>Printer</strong>........................................................ 53<br />
3.4.3 Uninstalling the <strong>Printer</strong> Drivers ......................................... 54<br />
3.5 Switching <strong>Printer</strong> Off-line ................................................................. 56<br />
3.6 Canceling Printing/Checking Job Status.......................................... 57<br />
3.6.1 Canceling Printing From Computer .................................. 57<br />
3.6.2 Canceling Printing From <strong>Printer</strong>........................................ 58<br />
3.6.3 Checking Job Status of Print Instruction........................... 60
Basic Printing<br />
3<br />
36<br />
3.1<br />
Flow of Printing (Windows)<br />
This section describes the basic flow of printing from Windows environment.<br />
(This may differ according to the client or system structure used.)<br />
Refer to the guide of the application program for details on the process.<br />
If necessary<br />
Set port<br />
Check the following before sending print data from the client:<br />
● Check the status of the port to be used in the System Administration Mode.<br />
“5.7 Print Mode Settings” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier) for details on the<br />
process.<br />
Specify printing from application<br />
program.<br />
If necessary<br />
If necessary<br />
Activate application program used on the client.<br />
Refer to the guide of the application program for details on the process.<br />
Stop printing<br />
“3.6 Canceling Printing/Checking Job Status” (P. 57) for details on the process.<br />
Output<br />
“3.6 Canceling Printing/Checking Job Status” (P. 57) for details on the process.<br />
End
3.2<br />
About Paper<br />
This section describes the points to be note about the paper to be used for printing with the<br />
machine. Other than these, there is no difference on using paper for copying and printing.<br />
“2.1 Loading Paper” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier) for details on paper types suitable or<br />
unsuitable for copying and loading in each tray.<br />
3.2.1 Difference From Copying<br />
● When using tray 5 (Bypass Tray), there is a restriction on the orientation of<br />
loading paper.<br />
“3.2.6 Loading Paper in Tray 5 (Bypass Tray)” (P. 40) for details on the orientation of loading<br />
paper and using tray 5 (Bypass Tray).<br />
3.2.2 Caution for Printing<br />
● If the paper size or type used for printing is different from the selection on the<br />
printer driver, or if the paper is loaded in an unsuitable paper tray, it may cause<br />
paper jam. In order to print correctly, select the correct paper size and type, as<br />
well as the paper tray.<br />
● When printing with 12 × 18" paper size, move the paper guide before loading<br />
the paper.<br />
“3.2.6 Loading Paper in Tray 5 (Bypass Tray)” (P. 40) for details on how to print or move the<br />
paper guide.<br />
● When printing with non-standard paper sizes, you may need to customize the<br />
paper size on the printer driver.<br />
The On-line Help of the printer driver for details on customizing paper size.<br />
Basic Printing<br />
3<br />
37
Basic Printing<br />
3<br />
38<br />
3.2 About Paper<br />
3.2.3 Paper Supply<br />
This section describes supplying different paper types for use with this machine.<br />
When printing with plain paper, all paper trays can be used. The paper sizes that<br />
can be loaded depend on the paper trays.<br />
“2.1 Loading Paper” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier) for details on suitable paper<br />
sizes.<br />
When printing with non-standard paper sizes, even with the plain paper type, use<br />
tray 5 (Bypass Tray). You will need to customize the paper size on the printer<br />
driver in order to print.<br />
The On-line Help of the printer driver for details on customizing paper size and the method of printing.<br />
When printing with special paper, such as transparencies and heavyweight<br />
paper, use tray 5 (Bypass Tray). On the properties dialog box of the printer<br />
driver, be sure to select Tray 5 (Bypass) from the Paper Source menu on the<br />
Paper/Output tab, and then select the correct paper type from the Paper Type<br />
(Bypass Tray) menu.<br />
Automatic tray switching<br />
When a paper tray using plain paper runs out of paper during printing, it can be<br />
configured to switch automatically to another tray with the same paper size and<br />
orientation to continue printing.<br />
This Auto Tray Switch feature works only when Auto has been selected from the<br />
Paper Source menu on the Paper/Output tab.<br />
Auto Tray Switch can be individually set for each of paper trays 1 – 4. For trays<br />
loaded with paper type you do not use often, you may not want to include them<br />
as the target paper tray for tray switching.<br />
“5.4 Setting the System Settings (Common Settings)” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong><br />
(Copier) for details on how to configure this feature. You can also use CentreWare Internet Services<br />
to configure the settings. For details on CentreWare Internet Services, see “Chapter 5 Configuring<br />
From Computer (CentreWare Internet Services)” (P. 105).<br />
This Auto Tray Switch feature is displayed as Disable Auto Tray Switch in the Common Menu and<br />
CentreWare Internet Services.<br />
Tray 5 (Bypass) cannot be used as the target tray for this Auto Tray Switch feature.<br />
By default, Auto Tray Switch is enabled.
3.2.4 Outputting Paper<br />
3.2 About Paper<br />
When the offset output tray or finisher has been installed, you can use Job Offset<br />
feature in addition to the usual way of outputting paper during printing.<br />
For the finisher, suitable paper sizes for the Job Offset feature are A3, B4, A4, A4 , B5 , 8K, 8×10",<br />
8.5×11", 8.5×11" , 8.5×13", 8.5×14", and 11×17".<br />
The various ways of outputting paper when the Job Offset feature is combined<br />
with the Collated feature of the printer driver are as follows:<br />
Example of printing three sets of a 3-page document<br />
Job Offset on<br />
Job Offset off<br />
The On-line Help of the printer driver for details on the Job Offset and Collated features.<br />
Output side of paper<br />
Collated Uncollated<br />
1 2<br />
3 4<br />
1 Printing will be done by set (in the sequence of pages 1, 2, 3, 1, 2, 3, 1, 2, 3)<br />
and then output offset from each set.<br />
2 Printing will be done by page number (in the sequence of pages 1, 1, 1, 2, 2, 2, 3, 3, 3)<br />
and then output offset from the previous print job.<br />
3 Printing will be done by set (in the sequence of pages 1, 2, 3, 1, 2, 3, 1, 2, 3)<br />
and then output without offset.<br />
4<br />
Printing will be done by page number (in the sequence of pages 1, 1, 1, 2, 2, 2, 3, 3, 3)<br />
and then output without offset.<br />
The paper is usually output with the printed side facing down. However, when<br />
output to the optional side output tray, the printed side will be facing up.<br />
3.2.5 Loading Paper in Trays 1 to 4<br />
For details on how to load paper, see “Chapter 2 Loading Paper” in “Part 1 Hardware”<br />
of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier).<br />
Basic Printing<br />
3<br />
39
Basic Printing<br />
3<br />
40<br />
3.2 About Paper<br />
3.2.6 Loading Paper in Tray 5 (Bypass Tray)<br />
To print special paper such as transparencies, heavyweight and non-standard<br />
paper sizes that cannot be loaded in trays 1 - 4, use tray 5 (Bypass Tray).<br />
● Loading special paper such as transparencies, heavyweight, and non-standard paper sizes in trays<br />
1 - 4 may cause paper jam or machine breakdown.<br />
● Use only transparencies exclusively made for this machine. If not, it may cause paper jams or<br />
machine breakdown.<br />
● Use only lables exclusively made for this machine. If not, it may cause paper jams or machine<br />
breakdown.<br />
● You do not need to specify the paper size/type on the Tray 5 (Bypass) screen which is displayed on<br />
the control panel (touch panel display) when paper is loaded.<br />
The On-line Help of the printer driver for details on printing special papers like transparencies.<br />
When printing with tray 5 (Bypass Tray), be sure to select Tray 5 (Bypass) from<br />
the Paper Source menu on the Paper/Output tab, and then select the correct<br />
paper type from the Paper Type (Bypass Tray) menu on the printer driver<br />
screen.
3.2 About Paper<br />
The range of paper that can be used for tray 5 (Bypass Tray) is as follows:<br />
Paper Size<br />
Non-standard paper<br />
sizes* 3 :<br />
Short edge 100 – 305 mm<br />
Long edge 140 – 482.6 mm<br />
Standard paper sizes:<br />
A3, B4, A4, A4 * 5 ,<br />
B5, B5 * 5 , A5 * 5 , B6, A6,<br />
8K, 5.5×8.5”, 5.5×8.5” * 5 ,<br />
8.5×11", 8.5×11" * 5 ,<br />
8.5×13", 8.5×14", 11×17",<br />
12×18"* 4 , Custom 1-5<br />
Paper Weight<br />
G.S.M.* 1<br />
55 – 220<br />
g/m 2<br />
Ream<br />
Weight* 2<br />
47 – 189<br />
kg<br />
Paper Type<br />
Bond<br />
(64 – less than<br />
105 g/m2 )<br />
Plain<br />
(64 – less than<br />
105 g/m2 )<br />
Recycled<br />
(64 – less than<br />
105 g/m2 )<br />
Heavyweight 1 -<br />
Side 2<br />
(106 – 169 g/m2 )<br />
Heavyweight 2 -<br />
Side 2<br />
(170 – 220 g/m2 )<br />
Transparency* 6<br />
Lightweight<br />
(55 – 63 g/m2 )<br />
Labels<br />
Custom 1-5<br />
Loading<br />
Capacity<br />
Up to 10 mm;<br />
100 sheets<br />
(P paper)<br />
*1 G.S.M. is the weight of a sheet of paper with an area of one square meter.<br />
*2 Ream weight refers to the weight of 1,000 sheets of paper of size 788 × 1,091 mm.<br />
*3 When printing with non-standard paper sizes, you will need to customize the paper size<br />
on the printer driver. For details on customizing paper size, see the On-line Help of the<br />
printer driver.<br />
*4 When printing with 12×18" paper size, move the paper guide before loading the paper.<br />
For details on moving the paper guide, see “ Moving paper guide” (P. 44).<br />
*5 To set orientation, you need to configure the setting on the Configuration tab of the<br />
printer driver. For details, see the on-line Help of the printer driver.<br />
*6 For transparency, A4, A3, Letter and Ledger sizes can be used. Moreover, it is recommended<br />
to load in the portrait direction when loading transparencies in tray 5 (Bypass<br />
Tray).<br />
● If the paper size or type used for printing is different from the selection on the printer driver, it may<br />
cause paper jam. In order to print correctly, select the correct paper size and type, as well as the<br />
paper tray.<br />
● When outputting transparencies continuously, they might stick to each other. To prevent that,<br />
remove about 20 sheets from the output tray, and then fan well to lower the temperature.<br />
Basic Printing<br />
3<br />
41
Basic Printing<br />
3<br />
42<br />
3.2 About Paper<br />
Loading procedure<br />
Procedure<br />
Display the Paper/Output tab to configure the settings.<br />
Only for bond, plain paper, recycled and heavyweight, you can print on the<br />
reverse side of this paper that has been printed before.<br />
Use Wordpad of Windows 98 as an example. The procedure is same when using<br />
other OS.<br />
1 Open tray 5 (Bypass Tray).<br />
If necessary, pull out the extension tray. The extension<br />
tray can be pulled out in two stages.<br />
2 Check the position of the paper guide<br />
located in front of tray 5 (Bypass Tray).<br />
Set the paper guide to the Standard position for normal<br />
use.<br />
If the paper guide is at the 12" (305 mm) position, move<br />
it back to the Standard position. Also, for paper sizes<br />
with width exceeding that of A3 i.e. 297 mm (e.g. 12 ×<br />
18"), move the paper guide. For details on moving the<br />
paper guide, see “ Moving paper guide” (P. 44).
3 Insert paper with the side to be printed<br />
facing down, and push it right to the<br />
end while aligning it with the paper<br />
guide in front of you.<br />
● As settings can be done when printing from the computer,<br />
you do not need to specify the paper size/type<br />
on the Tray 5 (Bypass) screen which is displayed on<br />
the control panel (touch panel display) when paper is<br />
loaded.<br />
● Do not load different paper types together. It may<br />
cause paper jam.<br />
● Do not load paper exceeding the maximum fill line. It<br />
may cause paper jam or machine breakdown.<br />
● When printing heavyweight, curl the tip of the paper<br />
as shown on the right diagram if paper cannot be fed<br />
into the machine. However, if paper is too curled or<br />
creased, it may cause paper jams.<br />
Different paper sizes cannot be loaded at the same time.<br />
4 Adjust the paper size guide to fit the<br />
paper loaded.<br />
5 Select Print from the File menu.<br />
6 Check Name and then click Properties.<br />
3.2 About Paper<br />
Depending on the application program, the way to display the printer properties dialog box may differ.<br />
See the manual of the application program used.<br />
7 Click the Paper/Output tab.<br />
Basic Printing<br />
3<br />
43
Basic Printing<br />
3<br />
44<br />
3.2 About Paper<br />
8 From Paper Source, select Tray 5 (Bypass).<br />
9 Select the paper type from Paper Type (Bypass Tray).<br />
Here, we use plain paper as an example.<br />
When printing on the reverse side, select from Bond, Plain, Recycled, Heavyweight 1 (106-169 g/m2 )-<br />
Side 2, and Heavyweight 2 (170-220 g/m2 )-Side 2.<br />
10 Click OK.<br />
When outputting transparencies continuously, they may stick to each other. To prevent that, remove<br />
about 20 sheets from the output tray, and then fan well to lower the temperature.<br />
Moving paper guide<br />
When printing paper size with width exceeding that of A3 i.e. 297 mm (e.g.<br />
12×18"), move the paper guide to 12" (305 mm).<br />
When printing is done, be sure to move the paper guide back to the Standard position.
Procedure<br />
1 Slide the paper guide which is in front<br />
of tray 5 (Bypass Tray) to 12" (305<br />
mm).<br />
3.2.7 Changing Paper Size of Paper Tray<br />
3.2 About Paper<br />
For details on how to change the paper size, see “2.2 Changing the Size of<br />
Paper in Trays” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier).<br />
Also, the type of paper suitable for use depends on the paper tray. For details,<br />
see “2.1 Loading Paper” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier).<br />
Basic Printing<br />
3<br />
45
Basic Printing<br />
3<br />
46<br />
3.3<br />
This section describes printing features.<br />
3.3.1 Before Printing<br />
Printing Features<br />
In order to print from the computer, install the printer driver on the computer.<br />
<strong>Printer</strong> driver is a software which converts print data or instructions from the<br />
computer into data that can be understood by the printer.<br />
For details on how to install the printer driver, see “3.4 Installing/Uninstalling the<br />
<strong>Printer</strong> Drivers” (P. 50).<br />
● When using the Auditron feature, printing cannot be done if the user name and password of the<br />
machine are not correctly set at Specify Job Owner on the Configuration tab of the printer properties<br />
dialog box. For details on the settings of Specify Job Owner, see the on-line Help of the printer<br />
driver. For details on the Auditron feature, see “Chapter 6 Managing Totals and Outputting<br />
Reports” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier).<br />
● For details on direct printing of TIFF images, see the Network Print Environment <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong><br />
(Network.pdf) in the PCL Driver/Network Utility (Windows ® ) CD-ROM.<br />
3.3.2 Printing Procedure<br />
Procedure<br />
Printing procedure differs according to the application program used. For details,<br />
see the guide of your application program.<br />
This describes Wordpad which is included in Windows 95, Windows 98,<br />
Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000 and Windows XP as an example.<br />
1 Activate Wordpad and create a print data.<br />
2 Select Print from the File menu.<br />
The Print dialog box is displayed.
3 Check Name and then click Properties if necessary.<br />
The printer properties dialog box appears.<br />
4 Select the options.<br />
5 Click OK.<br />
6 Click OK from the Print dialog box.<br />
Printing will start.<br />
3.3.3 Setting Printing Features<br />
3.3 Printing Features<br />
Almost all printing features are set on the printer properties dialog box which<br />
appears when either printing from the application program or selecting Properties<br />
from the menu of the printer icon.<br />
From this displayed properties dialog box, select the features in each tab.<br />
The On-line Help of the printer driver for details on the options of the printer driver and the way of<br />
selecting the options. For details on using the On-line Help, see “3.3.4 Using On-line Help” (P. 49) .<br />
Basic Printing<br />
3<br />
47
Basic Printing<br />
3<br />
48<br />
3.3 Printing Features<br />
■When displayed from application program<br />
■When displayed from menu of the printer icon<br />
● For Windows NT 4.0, select options from the tabs that are displayed by selecting Document<br />
Defaults and Properties from the menu of the printer icon.<br />
● For Windows 2000 and Windows XP, select options from the tabs that are displayed by selecting<br />
Printing Preferences and Properties from the menu of the printer icon.<br />
● For Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000 and Windows XP, options are also displayed on the<br />
Color Management tab.<br />
Tab<br />
Tab
3.3.4 Using On-line Help<br />
3.3 Printing Features<br />
Explanation of the printer driver options and the basic printing process are found<br />
in the On-line Help.<br />
To view explanation of each option<br />
On the active properties dialog box of the printer driver, click the button on<br />
the top of the right corner of the window, and after the cursor has changed to<br />
click on the desired option.<br />
,<br />
To view basic process of printing<br />
On the active properties dialog box of the printer driver, click the Help button on<br />
the bottom right corner of the window to display a Help window which explains<br />
the displayed screen. Click the Contents button at the top left corner of the Help<br />
window to display a contents of the printing process.<br />
By double-clicking the title of the desired process, you will see the explanation.<br />
You can select Help when the tab unique to PCL printer driver is displayed.<br />
Basic Printing<br />
3<br />
49
Basic Printing<br />
3<br />
50<br />
3.4<br />
Installing/Uninstalling the<br />
<strong>Printer</strong> Drivers<br />
This section describes the procedure for installing and uninstalling the printer drivers.<br />
Two methods of installation are described here, one for a local printer and the other for a<br />
network printer.<br />
If you have installed an earlier version of the printer driver, uninstall it first by following the<br />
procedure in “3.4.3 Uninstalling the <strong>Printer</strong> Drivers” (P. 54) before installing the new version.<br />
3.4.1 For a Local <strong>Printer</strong><br />
Procedure<br />
Local printer refers to a printer that is directly connected to your computer.<br />
1 Start Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0,<br />
Windows 2000 or Windows XP.<br />
For this example, we will install the C400 PCL 6 printer driver on the Windows 98 OS.<br />
2 Click Start, point to Settings, and click <strong>Printer</strong>s.<br />
3 In the <strong>Printer</strong>s window, double-click Add <strong>Printer</strong>.<br />
4 Click Next.
5 Select Local printer and click Next.<br />
3.4 Installing/Uninstalling the <strong>Printer</strong> Drivers<br />
6 Insert the PCL Driver/Network Utility (Windows ® ) CD-ROM in your CD-<br />
ROM drive.<br />
7 Click Have Disk.<br />
The Install From Disk dialog box appears.<br />
8 Enter “Drive Name:\English\DC_C400\Win98_Me\PCL6” in the “Copy<br />
manufacturer’s files from:” box and click OK.<br />
In this guide, we have used “E:” as the CD-ROM drive. If you are using<br />
a different drive for the CD-ROM, specify accordingly.<br />
● Click the Browse button to specify a folder in the CD-ROM.<br />
● Enter “DC_C320” instead of “DC_C400” if you are installing the C320 printer driver.<br />
● Enter “DC_C240” instead of “DC_C400” if you are installing the C240 printer driver.<br />
Basic Printing<br />
3<br />
51
Basic Printing<br />
3<br />
52<br />
3.4 Installing/Uninstalling the <strong>Printer</strong> Drivers<br />
9 Select your printer model from the <strong>Printer</strong>s list and click Next.<br />
10 Select the port that you are using and click Next.<br />
11 Type a name for the printer, specify whether you want to use the printer<br />
as the default printer, then click Next.
3.4 Installing/Uninstalling the <strong>Printer</strong> Drivers<br />
12 Specify whether you want to print a test page, then click Finish.<br />
Installation begins.<br />
3.4.2 For a Network <strong>Printer</strong><br />
Procedure<br />
Network printer refers to a printer that is connected to your computer through a<br />
network.<br />
1 Follow steps 1 to 4 of “3.4.1 For a Local <strong>Printer</strong>” (P. 50). Select Network<br />
printer instead of Local printer to share this machine on the network<br />
and then click Next.<br />
Basic Printing<br />
3<br />
53
Basic Printing<br />
3<br />
54<br />
3.4 Installing/Uninstalling the <strong>Printer</strong> Drivers<br />
2 Specify the path to the machine in the “Network path or gueue name:”<br />
box and click Next.<br />
● Click the Browse button to specify the network path of the machine.<br />
● If you do not know the network address of the network printer, contact with your system administrator.<br />
3 Follow steps 11 to 12 of “3.4.1 For a Local <strong>Printer</strong>” (P. 50) to complete<br />
the installation procedure.<br />
3.4.3 Uninstalling the <strong>Printer</strong> Drivers<br />
Procedure<br />
To uninstall the alternate drivers downloaded using the Add <strong>Printer</strong> Wizard dialog box at the client<br />
computer, open the <strong>Printer</strong>s window and erase the applicable printer icons.<br />
1 Click Start, point to Settings, and click <strong>Printer</strong>s.<br />
For this example, we will uninstall the C400 PCL 6 driver on the Windows 98 OS.<br />
2 Select the printer icon.<br />
3 Select Delete from the File menu.
■For Windows 95/98, Me, and Windows NT<br />
4 In the <strong>Printer</strong>s dialog box, click Yes.<br />
5 Click Yes.<br />
3.4 Installing/Uninstalling the <strong>Printer</strong> Drivers<br />
■For Windows 2000/XP<br />
4 Select Server Properties from the File menu.<br />
5 Click the Driver tab.<br />
6 Select the printer driver you want to remove and click Remove.<br />
7 Click Yes.<br />
8 Restart the OS.<br />
Basic Printing<br />
3<br />
55
Basic Printing<br />
3<br />
56<br />
3.5<br />
Switching <strong>Printer</strong> Off-line<br />
When the machine is switched to off-line, it cannot receive data. Data being received will be<br />
interrupted and will not be printed.<br />
Procedure<br />
1 On the control panel, press Machine Status.<br />
The Machine Status screen is displayed.<br />
2 On the screen, select Print Mode.<br />
<br />
The Print Mode screen is displayed.<br />
3 Select Off-line.<br />
Print Mode<br />
4 Select Close.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
Off-line<br />
On-line<br />
Close<br />
PCL Emulation HP-GL2 Emulation
3.6<br />
Canceling Printing/<br />
Checking Job Status<br />
To cancel printing, delete the print instruction on the computer first. If the print instruction<br />
cannot be deleted from the computer, delete it from this machine.<br />
You can check the status of print jobs from the computer.<br />
This section describes the different processes.<br />
3.6.1 Canceling Printing From Computer<br />
This section explains how to canceling print instructions from the computer.<br />
Canceling from Windows<br />
Procedure<br />
The procedure to cancel print instruction from Windows is as follows:<br />
1 From the Start menu, select Settings and then click <strong>Printer</strong>s.<br />
2 Open the icon of the printer model.<br />
3 In the windows displayed, click any document name and then press<br />
Delete on the keyboard.<br />
Canceling from CentreWare Internet Services<br />
You can use CentreWare Internet Services to cancel printing from the computer.<br />
For details on CentreWare Internet Services, see “Chapter 5 Configuring From<br />
Computer (CentreWare Internet Services)” (P. 105).<br />
Basic Printing<br />
3<br />
57
Basic Printing<br />
3<br />
58<br />
3.6 Canceling Printing/Checking Job Status<br />
3.6.2 Canceling Printing From <strong>Printer</strong><br />
The process to cancel printing from this machine is as follows:<br />
Canceling jobs in process<br />
Procedure<br />
If neither of the following two screens is displayed, see the procedure on the next<br />
page, “ Canceling jobs inside the machine” (P. 59).<br />
1 Either press Stop on the control panel or select Stop on the following<br />
screen.<br />
The job processing will be discontinued.<br />
Canceling jobs in the midst of printing<br />
Procedure<br />
Processing data...<br />
Print Job :Doc. No. 00456<br />
: akira. endo<br />
: Host1<br />
: document<br />
1 Either press Stop on the control panel or select Stop on the following<br />
screen.<br />
Printing in progress...<br />
Print Job :Doc. No. 00456<br />
: akira. endo<br />
: Host1<br />
: document<br />
Quantity : 2 / 4<br />
Pages : 2 / 10<br />
Center Output Tray<br />
The machine will pause and display the following screen.<br />
Stop<br />
Stop<br />
Close<br />
Close
3.6 Canceling Printing/Checking Job Status<br />
2 To stop printing, either press C on the control panel or select Stop on<br />
the following screen. However, the page in the midst of printing will be<br />
printed.<br />
To continue printing, either press the Start button on the control panel or select the Start button on the<br />
screen.<br />
Canceling jobs inside the machine<br />
Procedure<br />
Ready to print.<br />
Touch Start to resume printing or Stop to cancel the job.<br />
Print Job :Doc. No. 00456<br />
: akira. endo<br />
: Host1<br />
: document<br />
Quantity : 2 / 4<br />
Pages : 2 / 10<br />
Center Output Tray<br />
The process to cancel print jobs received by the machine is as follows. Through<br />
this procedure, you can interrupt the receiving of data and empty the buffer.<br />
Buffer is the location to store data sent from the client.<br />
You can also execute and print all jobs in the machine. For details, see “7.2.8 Forcibly Outputting<br />
Data Wait Documents” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier).<br />
1 On the control panel, press Job Status.<br />
The Job Status screen is displayed.<br />
2 On the screen, select Current and Pending Jobs.<br />
A list of jobs in process or waiting will be displayed.<br />
Stop<br />
Start<br />
Close<br />
Job Status<br />
Current and<br />
Pending Jobs<br />
Completed Jobs<br />
Stored<br />
Documents<br />
Print<br />
Waiting Jobs<br />
Doc. No. - Job Type Status Remote Terminal/Contents Pages<br />
00117-Copy Job Copying A4 : 100% 25/100<br />
00010-Print Job Print Wait <strong>Fuji</strong> Taro : MDG 0/120<br />
00015-Print Job Print Wait <strong>Fuji</strong> Taro : MDG 0/50<br />
Basic Printing<br />
3<br />
59
Basic Printing<br />
3<br />
60<br />
3.6 Canceling Printing/Checking Job Status<br />
3 Select the job that you want to delete.<br />
The job status will be displayed.<br />
4 Select Stop.<br />
The job processing will be discontinued.<br />
5 Select Close.<br />
Repeat steps 2 to 5 if you have other jobs to delete.<br />
3.6.3 Checking Job Status of Print Instruction<br />
The procedure to check the job status of print instruction is as follows:<br />
Using Windows<br />
Procedure<br />
Job Status<br />
Current and<br />
Pending Jobs<br />
Completed Jobs<br />
Stored<br />
Documents<br />
Doc. No. - Job Type Status Remote Terminal/Contents Pages<br />
00117-Copy Job Copying A4 : 100% 25/100<br />
00010-Print Job Print Wait <strong>Fuji</strong> Taro : MDG 0/120<br />
00015-Print Job Print Wait <strong>Fuji</strong> Taro : MDG 0/50<br />
: <strong>Fuji</strong> Taro<br />
: (CentreWare)<br />
: document<br />
Quantity :<br />
Pages :<br />
2 A4<br />
1 Sided<br />
Center Output Tray<br />
0/5<br />
120/120<br />
Print<br />
Waiting Jobs<br />
Print Job :Doc. No. 00010 Close<br />
1 From the Start menu, select Settings and then click <strong>Printer</strong>s.<br />
2 Open the icon of the printer model.<br />
Stop<br />
Promote Job
3 Check Status in the displayed window.<br />
Using CentreWare Internet Services<br />
3.6 Canceling Printing/Checking Job Status<br />
You can also use CentreWare Internet Services to check job status of print<br />
instruction in the machine.<br />
For details on CentreWare Internet Services, see “Chapter 5 Configuring From<br />
Computer (CentreWare Internet Services)” (P. 105).<br />
Using <strong>Printer</strong><br />
Procedure<br />
1 On the control panel, press Job Status.<br />
The Job Status screen is displayed.<br />
2 On the screen, select either Current and Pending Jobs or Completed<br />
Jobs.<br />
Job Status<br />
Current and<br />
Pending Jobs<br />
A list of jobs will be displayed.<br />
Completed Jobs<br />
Stored<br />
Documents<br />
Secure Print Sample Print Delayed Print<br />
Private Mailbox<br />
Basic Printing<br />
3<br />
61
Basic Printing<br />
3<br />
62<br />
3.6 Canceling Printing/Checking Job Status<br />
3 Check the job status.<br />
Job Status<br />
Current and<br />
Pending Jobs<br />
Completed Jobs<br />
Stored<br />
Documents<br />
Doc. No. - Job Type Status Remote Terminal/Contents Pages<br />
00117-Copy Job Copying A4 : 100% 25/100<br />
00010-Print Job Print Wait <strong>Fuji</strong> Taro : MDG 0/120<br />
00015-Print Job Print Wait <strong>Fuji</strong> Taro : MDG 0/50<br />
Print<br />
Waiting Jobs<br />
For example, if a job in waiting is selected, the following screen will be displayed.<br />
Print Job :Doc. No. 00010 Close<br />
: <strong>Fuji</strong> Taro<br />
: (CentreWare)<br />
: document<br />
Quantity :<br />
Pages<br />
2 A4<br />
1 Sided<br />
Center Output Tray<br />
:<br />
0 / 5<br />
100 /120<br />
4 After checking, press Features on the control panel.<br />
Stop<br />
Promote Job
4Special Printing<br />
4.1 Printing Special Papers.................................................................... 64<br />
4.2 Printing Non-Standard Paper Size................................................... 66<br />
4.2.1 Customizing Non-Standard Paper Size ............................ 66<br />
4.2.2 Printing Non-Standard Paper Size.................................... 68<br />
4.3 Secure Print ..................................................................................... 70<br />
4.3.1 Setting Secure Print Jobs ................................................. 70<br />
4.3.2 Printing Secure Print Jobs ................................................ 72<br />
4.4 Sample Print .................................................................................... 77<br />
4.4.1 Setting Sample Print Jobs ................................................ 77<br />
4.4.2 Printing Sample Print Jobs ............................................... 78<br />
4.5 Delayed Print.................................................................................... 83<br />
4.5.1 Setting Delayed Print Jobs ............................................... 83<br />
4.5.2 Printing Delayed Print Jobs .............................................. 85<br />
4.6 Expanding Print Areas for Printing................................................... 89<br />
4.7 E-mail Printing.................................................................................. 91<br />
4.7.1 System Environment......................................................... 91<br />
4.7.2 Sending E-mail ................................................................. 95<br />
4.8 Notify Job End by E-mail.................................................................. 97<br />
4.8.1 System Environment......................................................... 97<br />
4.8.2 Notifying by E-mail............................................................ 99<br />
4.9 Adding Banner Sheet for Printing .................................................. 101<br />
4.10 File Upload Printing........................................................................ 102
Special Printing<br />
4<br />
64<br />
4.1<br />
Printing Special Papers<br />
This section describes how to print special papers. The following special papers can be<br />
printed:<br />
● Heavyweight 1 (106-169 g/m 2 )<br />
● Heavyweight 1 (106-169 g/m 2 ) – Side 2<br />
● Heavyweight 2 (170-220 g/m 2 )<br />
● Heavyweight 2 (170-220 g/m 2 ) – Side 2<br />
● Transparency<br />
● Lightweight (55-63 g/m 2 )<br />
● Labels<br />
● Custom 1-5<br />
Use tray 5 (Bypass Tray) when printing these special papers.<br />
Display the Paper/Output tab to configure these paper supply settings.<br />
This will describe Wordpad of Windows 98 as an example. The procedure is the same when<br />
using other OS.<br />
● When outputting transparencies continuously, they may stick to each other. To prevent this, remove about 20<br />
sheets from the output tray, and then fan well to lower the temperature.<br />
● Use only labels exclusively made for this machine. If not, it may cause paper jams or machine breakdown.<br />
● Depending on the application program, the way to display the printer properties dialog box might differ. See the<br />
manual of the application program used.<br />
● When loading transparencies in tray 5 (Bypass Tray), you are recommended to load in the portrait orientation.<br />
● For details on using tray 5 (Bypass Tray), see “3.2.6 Loading Paper in Tray 5 (Bypass Tray)” (P. 40).<br />
“2.1 Loading Paper” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier) for details on paper types suitable or<br />
unsuitable for copying and loading in each tray.<br />
Procedure<br />
1 Load special paper in tray 5 (Bypass Tray).<br />
2 Select Print from the File menu.<br />
3 Check Name and then click Properties.<br />
4 Click the Paper/Output tab.
4.1 Printing Special Papers<br />
5 From the Paper Source drop-down list box, select Tray 5 (Bypass).<br />
6 Select the paper type from the Paper Type drop-down list box.<br />
7 Click OK to start printing.<br />
● When outputting transparencies continuously, they may stick to each other. To prevent this, remove<br />
about 20 sheets from the output tray, and then fan well to lower the temperature.<br />
● Use only labels exclusively made for this machine. If not, it may cause paper jams or machine<br />
breakdown.<br />
5<br />
6<br />
Special Printing<br />
4<br />
65
Special Printing<br />
4<br />
66<br />
4.2<br />
Printing Non-Standard<br />
Paper Size<br />
This section describes how to print non-standard paper size. To print non-standard paper<br />
size, you have to customize the paper size on the printer driver first.<br />
Once the non-standard paper size has been customized, you can select it from Paper Size<br />
and Output Size on the Paper/Output tab. Use tray 5 (Bypass Tray) for printing.<br />
You can customize up to five paper sizes with a separate name for each size. For sizes in<br />
millimeters, you can enter in units of 0.1 mm and between 100.0 – 305.0 mm for the short<br />
edge, 140.0 – 482.6 mm for the long edge; and for sizes in inches, in units of 0.01 inch and<br />
between 3.94 – 12.01 inch for the short edge, 5.51 – 19.00 inch for the long edge.<br />
For the name of the customized size, you can enter up to 14 characters.<br />
For Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, only Administrators can change the setting. All other users can<br />
only check the contents.<br />
As local printer uses the client’s form database, configuring settings on the Custom Paper Size dialog box on<br />
Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP will affect other printers of the client. For network printer, using<br />
form database of the server with print queue will also affect the shared printer on the same network of other clients.<br />
For Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows Me, defining customized paper sizes for each printer icon will not affect<br />
settings of other printer on the client. For network printer, defining customized paper sizes for each printer icon will<br />
also not affect the shared printer on the same network of other clients.<br />
4.2.1 Customizing Non-Standard Paper Size<br />
Procedure<br />
Customize non-standard paper size on the Custom Paper Size dialog box.<br />
1 From the Start menu, select Settings and then click <strong>Printer</strong>s to display<br />
the printer properties dialog box.<br />
2 Click the Configuration tab.
3 Click Custom Paper Size.<br />
The Custom Paper Size dialog box is displayed.<br />
4 Select the desired paper size from the Details list box.<br />
4.2 Printing Non-Standard Paper Size<br />
5 In the Change Setting For group, specify Short Edge and Long Edge.<br />
You can either enter the value with keyboard or use the buttons on the screen.<br />
Short Edge cannot be longer than Long Edge. Conversely, Long Edge cannot be shorter than Short<br />
Edge.<br />
6 To name the paper size, check the Name the Paper Size check box,<br />
and then enter the name at Name.<br />
You can enter up to 14 characters for the name.<br />
7 If necessary, repeat steps 4 to 6 to set the paper size.<br />
8 Click OK.<br />
4<br />
5<br />
6<br />
3<br />
Special Printing<br />
4<br />
67
Special Printing<br />
4<br />
68<br />
4.2 Printing Non-Standard Paper Size<br />
9 Click OK on the Configuration tab.<br />
4.2.2 Printing Non-Standard Paper Size<br />
Procedure<br />
The procedure to print non-standard paper size is as follows. Use tray 5 (Bypass<br />
Tray) for printing.<br />
“3.2.6 Loading Paper in Tray 5 (Bypass Tray)” (P. 40) for details on using tray 5 (Bypass Tray).<br />
Here, we use Wordpad of Windows 98 as an example. The procedure is the<br />
same when using other OS.<br />
Depending on the application program, the way to display the printer properties dialog box might differ.<br />
See the manual of the application program used.<br />
1 Load the non-standard paper size in tray 5 (Bypass Tray).<br />
2 Select Print from the File menu.<br />
3 Check Name and then click Properties.<br />
4 Click the Paper/Output tab.
4.2 Printing Non-Standard Paper Size<br />
5 From the Paper Source drop-down list box, select Tray 5 (Bypass).<br />
6 Select the paper type from the Paper Type drop-down list box.<br />
7 From the Output Size drop-down list box, select the needed non-standard<br />
paper size.<br />
8 Click OK to start printing.<br />
6 5<br />
7<br />
Special Printing<br />
4<br />
69
Special Printing<br />
4<br />
70<br />
4.3<br />
Secure Print<br />
You can add a password to your print data on the computer, send it to the machine for temporary<br />
storing; and then print out the data using the control panel on the machine. This feature<br />
is known as Secure Print. You can also save print data in the machine without a<br />
password and print frequently-used data directly from the machine without having to send<br />
print instruction from the client.<br />
You need to set the user name and password before printing.<br />
Up to 200 users and 1,000 files per user can be set. You can save up to 9,999 files or until<br />
the hard disk is full.<br />
4.3.1 Setting Secure Print Jobs<br />
Procedure<br />
To use the Secure Print feature, you need to set the user name and password.<br />
1 From the Start menu, select Settings and then click <strong>Printer</strong>s to display<br />
the printer properties dialog box.<br />
2 Click the Paper/Output tab.
3 Select Secure Print from the Job Type drop-down list box.<br />
The Secure Print Settings dialog box appears.<br />
4.3 Secure Print<br />
4 Enter the user ID within 24 characters at the Secure/Sample Print <strong>User</strong><br />
ID text box.<br />
The user ID entered here will be displayed as the user ID on the Secure Print screen on the touch panel<br />
display of the machine. You can register the same user ID more than once if it is used with different<br />
passwords.<br />
5 When password is set, enter a password of four-digits of less in the<br />
Password text box and the Confirm Password text box.<br />
6 Click OK.<br />
3<br />
Special Printing<br />
4<br />
71
Special Printing<br />
4<br />
72<br />
4.3 Secure Print<br />
4.3.2 Printing Secure Print Jobs<br />
This section describes how to print Secure Print jobs.<br />
First, set and send the Secure Print job at the client. Then, execute the print<br />
instruction at the machine to print out the data.<br />
You can also check or delete print jobs saved in the machine using the same<br />
procedure of executing print instruction at the machine.<br />
At the computer<br />
Procedure<br />
Here, we use Wordpad of Windows 98 as an example. The procedure is the<br />
same when using other OS.<br />
Depending on the application program, the way to display the printer properties dialog box might differ.<br />
See the manual of the application program used.<br />
1 Select Print from the File menu.<br />
2 Check Name and then click Properties.<br />
3 Click the Paper/Output tab and select Secure Print from the Job Type<br />
drop-down list box.<br />
The Secure Print Settings dialog box is displayed.<br />
If necessary, click the Secure Print button and change the settings.<br />
4
4 Confirm the <strong>User</strong> ID and Password.<br />
4.3 Secure Print<br />
5 From Retrieve Document drop-down list box,select either Enter Document<br />
Name or Auto Retrieve.<br />
If Enter Document Name has been selected, enter the name within 24 characters at the Document<br />
Name text box.<br />
For either of the two options of specifying the document name, only the first 24 characters will be recognized<br />
if more than that are entered.<br />
The document name entered here will be displayed as the document name on the Secure Print screen<br />
on the touch panel display of the machine.<br />
6 Click OK.<br />
7 Click OK on the Paper/Output tab to carry out printing.<br />
At the machine<br />
Procedure<br />
This section describes the procedure to output print data stored inside the<br />
machine.<br />
1 On the control panel, press Job Status.<br />
The Job Status screen is displayed.<br />
4<br />
5<br />
Special Printing<br />
4<br />
73
Special Printing<br />
4<br />
74<br />
4.3 Secure Print<br />
2 On the screen, select Stored Documents and then Secure Print.<br />
Job Status<br />
Current and<br />
Pending Jobs<br />
Completed Jobs<br />
Stored<br />
Documents<br />
Secure Print Sample Print Delayed Print<br />
Private Mailbox<br />
The Secure Print screen is displayed and the user ID specified on the printer driver will be displayed.<br />
3 Select the user ID which you want to check, followed by Document<br />
List.<br />
Selecting the button will display the previous screen and the button the next screen. Or using<br />
the numeric keypad on the control panel, you can also enter the ID number at Go to to specify the<br />
required ID directly.<br />
Once the user ID has been selected, the saved number will be displayed at No. of Docs. on the bottom<br />
right of the screen.<br />
Secure Print<br />
001 <strong>Fuji</strong> Taro 002 <strong>Fuji</strong> Hanako<br />
003 Endo<br />
004 Imai<br />
005 Fukada<br />
006 Motohashi<br />
Refresh<br />
Go to<br />
(001-200)<br />
Document List<br />
● Selecting the Refresh button will display the latest information.<br />
● If the password has been set, the screen to enter the password will appear. Enter the password set<br />
on the printer driver and then select the Confirm button.<br />
● If you have forgotten the password, you can display the document saved in the System Administration<br />
Mode. For details on System Administration Mode, see “Chapter 5 System Administration<br />
Mode Settings” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier).<br />
Close
4.3 Secure Print<br />
4 In the password entry screen, enter the same password as the one<br />
entered in the printer driver, then click Confirm.<br />
<strong>Fuji</strong> Taro<br />
Password<br />
The information of the document saved in the specified user ID will be displayed under Document<br />
Name, Stored Date and Pages. The name displayed in Document Name will be the document name set<br />
on the printer driver.<br />
5 Select the document to be printed, followed by Print.<br />
Selecting the Select All button will select all the documents. Selecting it again to deselect. To delete<br />
document, select the document, followed by the Delete button.<br />
A screen for confirmation will be displayed.<br />
Confirm<br />
Cancel<br />
<strong>Fuji</strong> Taro<br />
Refresh<br />
Close<br />
No. Document Name Stored Date Pages No.of Docs. : 2<br />
1 Secure Print<br />
2001/10/7 8:10 AM 22<br />
2 Dialog SOD<br />
2001/10/8 7:30 PM 5<br />
Select All<br />
6 Check the contents displayed on the screen and then make the necessary<br />
selection.<br />
■If Print is selected:<br />
Selecting the Cancel button will return you to the screen from step 4.<br />
<strong>Fuji</strong> Taro<br />
No. The following document(s)s will be printed.<br />
1<br />
<strong>User</strong> ID<br />
Doc.Name<br />
:<strong>Fuji</strong> Taro<br />
2001/10/7 8:10 AM<br />
:Secure Print 1<br />
2 Stored Date :2001/10/8 7:30 2001/10/8 PM 7:30 PM<br />
Select to delete or save the document after printing.<br />
Print and<br />
Delete<br />
Print and<br />
Save<br />
22<br />
5<br />
Refresh<br />
Cancel<br />
Print<br />
Delete<br />
Close<br />
Special Printing<br />
4<br />
75
Special Printing<br />
4<br />
76<br />
4.3 Secure Print<br />
■If Delete is selected:<br />
Selecting the No button will return you to the screen from step 4.<br />
<strong>Fuji</strong> Taro<br />
The following document will be deleted.<br />
1<br />
<strong>User</strong> ID<br />
Doc. Name<br />
:<strong>Fuji</strong> Taro<br />
2001/10/7 8:10 AM<br />
:Dialog SOD<br />
2 Stored Date<br />
Are you sure?<br />
:2001/10/8 2001/10/8 7:30 PM 7:30 PM<br />
Refresh<br />
Deleting all the documents of a user ID will delete the user ID.<br />
7 Select Close repeatedly until the Job Status screen is displayed.<br />
22<br />
5<br />
Yes No<br />
Close
4.4<br />
Sample Print<br />
When printing multiple copies, you can print out only the first set to check the printing result<br />
first before printing the remaining copies from the printer control panel. This feature is<br />
known as Sample Print.<br />
You need to set the user name before printing.<br />
Up to 200 users and 1,000 files per user can be set. You can save up to 9,999 files or until<br />
the hard disk is full.<br />
4.4.1 Setting Sample Print Jobs<br />
Procedure<br />
To use the Sample Print feature, you need to set the user name.<br />
1 From the Start menu, select Settings and then click <strong>Printer</strong>s to display<br />
the printer properties dialog box.<br />
2 Click the Paper/Output tab.<br />
Special Printing<br />
4<br />
77
Special Printing<br />
4<br />
78<br />
4.4 Sample Print<br />
3 Select Sample Print from the Job Type drop-down list box.<br />
The Sample Print Settings dialog box appears.<br />
4 Enter the user ID within 24 characters at the <strong>User</strong> ID text box.<br />
The user ID entered here will be displayed as the user ID on the Sample Print screen on the touch<br />
panel display of the machine.<br />
5 Click OK.<br />
4.4.2 Printing Sample Print Jobs<br />
This section describes how to print Sample Print jobs.<br />
First, set and send the Sample Print job at the client. Then, execute the print<br />
instruction at the machine to print out the remaining data.<br />
You can also check or delete print jobs saved in the machine using the same<br />
procedure of executing print instruction at the machine.<br />
At the computer<br />
Here, we use Wordpad of Windows 98 as an example. The procedure is the<br />
same when using other OS.<br />
Depending on the application program, the way to display the printer properties dialog box might differ.<br />
See the manual of the application program used.<br />
3
Procedure<br />
1 Select Print from the File menu.<br />
2 Check Name and then click Properties.<br />
3 Click the Paper/Output tab and set Copies to at least 2.<br />
4 Select Sample Print from the Job Type drop-down list box.<br />
The Sample Print Settings dialog box is displayed.<br />
If necessary, click the Sample Print button and change the settings.<br />
5 Confirm <strong>User</strong> ID.<br />
5<br />
6<br />
4<br />
4.4 Sample Print<br />
Special Printing<br />
4<br />
79
Special Printing<br />
4<br />
80<br />
4.4 Sample Print<br />
6 From Retrieve Document drop-down list box, select either Enter Document<br />
Name or Auto Retrieve.<br />
If Enter Document Name has been selected, enter the name within 24 characters at the Document<br />
Name text box.<br />
For either of the two options of specifying the document name, only the first 24 characters will be recognized<br />
if more than that are entered.<br />
The document name entered here will be displayed as the document name on the Sample Print screen<br />
on the touch panel display of the machine.<br />
7 Click OK.<br />
8 Click OK on the Paper/Output tab to carry out printing.<br />
At the machine<br />
Procedure<br />
The following describes the procedure to output the remaining print data stored<br />
inside the machine.<br />
1 On the control panel, press Job Status.<br />
The Job Status screen is displayed.<br />
2 On the screen, select Stored Documents and then Sample Print.<br />
Job Management<br />
Secure Print Sample Print<br />
Private Mailbox<br />
Current and<br />
Pending Jobs<br />
Completed Jobs<br />
Stored<br />
Documents<br />
Delayed Print<br />
The Sample Print screen is displayed and the user ID specified on the printer driver will be displayed.
4.4 Sample Print<br />
3 Select the user ID which you want to check, followed by Document<br />
List.<br />
Selecting the button will display the previous screen and the button the next screen. Or using<br />
the numeric keypad on the control panel, you can also enter the ID number at Go to to specify the<br />
required ID directly.<br />
Once the user ID has been selected, the saved number will be displayed at No. of Docs. on the bottom<br />
right of the screen.<br />
Selecting the Refresh button will display the latest information.<br />
Sample Print<br />
001 <strong>Fuji</strong> Taro 002 <strong>Fuji</strong> Hanako<br />
003 Endo<br />
004 Imai<br />
005 Fukada<br />
006 Motohashi<br />
The information of the document saved in the specified user ID will be displayed under Doc. Name,<br />
Stored Date and Pages. The name displayed in Doc. Name will be the document name set on the<br />
printer driver.<br />
4 Select the document to be printed, followed by Print.<br />
Selecting the Select All button will select all the documents. Selecting it again to deselect. To delete<br />
document, select the document, followed by the Delete button.<br />
<strong>Fuji</strong> Taro<br />
No. Doc. Name Stored Date Pages<br />
1 Planning Paper 2001/10/7 8:10 AM 52<br />
2 Goods Guidance 2001/10/8 7:30 PM 35<br />
A screen for confirmation will be displayed.<br />
Refresh<br />
Refresh<br />
Close<br />
Go to<br />
(001-200)<br />
Document List<br />
No. of Docs. : 2<br />
Select All<br />
Print<br />
Delete<br />
Close<br />
No. of Docs. : 2<br />
Special Printing<br />
4<br />
81
Special Printing<br />
4<br />
82<br />
4.4 Sample Print<br />
5 Check the contents displayed on the screen and then make the necessary<br />
selection.<br />
■If Print is selected:<br />
Selecting the No button will return you to the screen of step 4.<br />
<strong>Fuji</strong> Taro<br />
The following documents will be deleted after printed.<br />
<strong>User</strong> ID :<strong>Fuji</strong> Taro<br />
Doc. Name :Goods Guidance<br />
Stored Date :2001/10/8 7:30 PM<br />
Are you sure?<br />
Yes No<br />
Refresh<br />
■If Delete is selected:<br />
Selecting the No button will return you to the screen of step 4.<br />
<strong>Fuji</strong> Taro<br />
The following document(s) will be deleted.<br />
<strong>User</strong> ID :<strong>Fuji</strong> Taro<br />
Doc. Name :Goods Guidance<br />
Stored Date :2001/10/8 7:30 PM<br />
Are you sure?<br />
Yes No<br />
Refresh<br />
Deleting all the documents of an user ID will delete the user ID.<br />
6 Select Close repeatedly until the Job Status screen is displayed.<br />
Close<br />
Close
4.5<br />
Delayed Print<br />
You can start the print job at the time set in advance. You can also start printing before<br />
reaching the time using the control panel. This feature is known as Delayed Print.<br />
You need to set the user name before printing.<br />
Up to 200 users and 1,000 files per user can be set. You can save up to 9,999 files or until<br />
the hard disk is full.<br />
4.5.1 Setting Delayed Print Jobs<br />
Procedure<br />
To use the Delayed Print feature, you need to set the user name.<br />
1 From the Start menu, select Settings and then click <strong>Printer</strong>s to display<br />
the printer properties dialog box.<br />
2 Click the Paper/Output tab.<br />
Special Printing<br />
4<br />
83
Special Printing<br />
4<br />
84<br />
4.5 Delayed Print<br />
3 Select Delayed Print from the Job Type drop-down list box.<br />
The Delayed Print Settings dialog box appears.<br />
4 Enter the time on a 24-hour basis to start printing at the Time box.<br />
5 Click OK.
4.5.2 Printing Delayed Print Jobs<br />
4.5 Delayed Print<br />
This section describes how to print Delayed Print jobs.<br />
First, set and send the Delayed Print job at the client. When printing the delayed<br />
print jobs before being time to be set, use the control panel on the machine.<br />
You can also check or delete print jobs saved in the machine using the same<br />
procedure of executing print instruction at the printer.<br />
At the computer<br />
Procedure<br />
Here, we use Wordpad of Windows 98 as an example. The procedure is the<br />
same when using other OS.<br />
Depending on the application program, the way to display the printer properties dialog box might differ.<br />
See the manual of the application program used.<br />
1 Select Print from the File menu.<br />
2 Check Name and then click Properties.<br />
3 Click the Paper/Output tab.<br />
4 Select Delayed Print from the Job Type drop-down list box.<br />
The Delayed Print dialog box is displayed.<br />
If necessary, click the Delayed Print button and change the settings.<br />
Special Printing<br />
4<br />
85
Special Printing<br />
4<br />
86<br />
4.5 Delayed Print<br />
5 Confirm the time at the Time box.<br />
6 From Retrieve Document drop-down list box, select either Enter Document<br />
Name or Auto Retrieve.<br />
If Enter Document Name has been selected, enter the name within 24 characters at the Document<br />
Name text box.<br />
For either of the two options of specifying the document name, only the first 24 characters will be recognized<br />
if more than that are entered.<br />
The document name entered here will be displayed as the document name on the Delayed Print screen<br />
on the touch panel display of the printer.<br />
7 Click OK.<br />
8 Click OK on the Paper/Output tab to carry out printing.<br />
At the printer<br />
Procedure<br />
The following describes the procedure to output the remaining print data stored<br />
inside the printer forcibely before the time specified on the computer driver will<br />
come.<br />
1 On the control panel, press Job Status.<br />
The Job Status screen is displayed.
4.5 Delayed Print<br />
2 On the screen, select Stored Documents and then Delayed Print.<br />
Job Management<br />
Current and<br />
Pending Jobs<br />
Completed Jobs<br />
Secure Print Sample Print Delayed Print<br />
Private Mailbox<br />
The Delayed Print screen is displayed and the Time specified on the printer driver is displayed.<br />
3 Select the document to be printed before the specified time, followed by<br />
Print.<br />
To delete document, select the document, followed by the Delete button.<br />
Delayed Print<br />
No. Document Name Print Time Pages<br />
1 Planning Paper 10:00 AM<br />
52<br />
2 Goods Guidance 11:50 AM<br />
35<br />
3 <strong>User</strong>s <strong>Guide</strong><br />
8:36 PM 620<br />
A screen for confirmation will be displayed.<br />
Stored<br />
Documents<br />
Refresh<br />
Print<br />
Delete<br />
Close<br />
No. of Docs: 3<br />
Special Printing<br />
4<br />
87
Special Printing<br />
4<br />
88<br />
4.5 Delayed Print<br />
4 Check the contents displayed on the screen and then make the necessary<br />
selection.<br />
■If Print is selected:<br />
Selecting the No button will return to the screen of Step 4.<br />
Delayed Print<br />
Refresh<br />
The following document(s) will be deleted after printing.<br />
Doc. Name :Planning Paper<br />
Print Time :10:00 AM (Stored Date : 2001/10/8 9:50 PM)<br />
<strong>User</strong> Name :<strong>Fuji</strong> Taro<br />
Host Name :Alpha<br />
The job will not print at the programmed time. Do you want to print now?<br />
Yes No<br />
■If Delete is selected:<br />
Selecting the No button will return to the screen of Step 4.<br />
Delayed Print<br />
The following document(s) will be deleted.<br />
Doc. Name :Planning Paper<br />
Print Time :10:00 AM (Stored Date : 2001/10/8 9:50 PM)<br />
<strong>User</strong> Name<br />
Host Name<br />
Are you sure?<br />
:<strong>Fuji</strong> Taro<br />
:Alpha<br />
Yes No<br />
Refresh<br />
5 Select Close repeatedly until the Job Status screen is displayed.<br />
Close<br />
Close
4.6<br />
Expanding Print Areas for<br />
Printing<br />
By changing the print area and the margins, you can expand the print area for printing.<br />
Depending on the application program, you might not obtain the desired print result.<br />
“A.2 Printable Area” (P. 233) for details on the printable areas.<br />
Display the Print Areas/Margin dialog box to configure the print settings.<br />
Here, we use Wordpad of Windows 98 as an example. The procedure is the same when<br />
using other OS.<br />
● Depending on the application program, the way to display the printer properties dialog box might differ. See the<br />
manual of the application program used.<br />
● <strong>User</strong>s who are considered as Guests, Replicator or <strong>User</strong>s of Windows 2000, Windows XP or Windows NT 4.0<br />
cannot configure the margin settings.<br />
Procedure<br />
1 Select Print from the File menu.<br />
2 Check Name and then click Properties.<br />
3 Click Printable Area on the Paper/Output tab.<br />
The Printable Area dialog box is displayed.<br />
3<br />
Special Printing<br />
4<br />
89
Special Printing<br />
4<br />
90<br />
4.6 Expanding Print Areas for Printing<br />
4 Click Extended.<br />
5 Click OK.<br />
6 Click OK on the Paper/Output tab to carry out printing.<br />
4
4.7<br />
E-mail Printing<br />
You can send an e-mail with a TIFF or PDF document attached, from the computer to the<br />
machine. Upon receiving the mail, the machine will print it out automatically. This feature is<br />
known as “E-mail Printing”.<br />
In order to print PDF document, you need the PostScript Software Kit (option).<br />
4.7.1 System Environment<br />
The following settings have to be configured in order to use the E-mail Printing<br />
feature. Check with your system administrator or network administrator on<br />
whether these settings have been configured.<br />
Network environment<br />
Register the user account.<br />
Mail Print environment<br />
Using CentreWare Internet Services, set the Port Status, Machine E-mail<br />
Address, TCP/IP, and mail server settings.<br />
Special Printing<br />
4<br />
91
Special Printing<br />
4<br />
92<br />
4.7 E-mail Printing<br />
Procedure<br />
1 Activate CentreWare Internet Services and then click Properties.<br />
“5.4 Activating” (P. 113) for details on activating CentreWare Internet Services.<br />
2 Do the settings for the items shown in the table below.<br />
Item in the<br />
frame<br />
Machine<br />
Details<br />
Item Description Value<br />
Administrator<br />
E-mail<br />
Address<br />
Machine Email<br />
Address<br />
Sets the administrator’s e-mail<br />
address.<br />
Sets the e-mail address of this<br />
machine. This address is displayed<br />
at the From box on e-mail.<br />
● When receiving E-Mail via SMTP<br />
An alias cannot be set. You can set<br />
any name for the account (on the<br />
left side of @). Set the address<br />
section (on the right side of @),<br />
with the combination of the host<br />
name and domain name.<br />
<br />
ifax@dcc400.fujixerox.co.jp<br />
Account name: ifax<br />
Host name: dcc400<br />
Domain Name: fujixerox.co.jp<br />
Enter an<br />
address<br />
within 127<br />
characters.<br />
Settings to<br />
define based<br />
on the protocol<br />
SMTP POP3
Item in the<br />
frame<br />
Machine<br />
Details<br />
Item Description Value<br />
Machine Email<br />
Address<br />
● When receiving E-mails via POP3<br />
Enter the POP user name (on the<br />
left side of @) and incoming POP3<br />
mail server name in the address<br />
section (on the right side of @).<br />
You can set an alias, such as<br />
ifax@fujixerox.co.jp.<br />
<br />
ifax@mb1.abc.fujixerox.co.jp<br />
Account name: ifax<br />
Enter an<br />
address<br />
within 127<br />
characters.<br />
Port Status Receive E-mail<br />
Send E-mail<br />
Select the check box.<br />
TCP/IP under Host Name Sets the host name of this machine. Enter an<br />
Protocol Set-<br />
address<br />
tings<br />
within 32<br />
characters.<br />
Get DNS Select the check box if you want to<br />
Address get the DNS server address automatically<br />
from the DHCP server.<br />
DNS<br />
Address1-3<br />
Domain<br />
Name<br />
Enter the DNS server address. xxx.xxx.xxx.<br />
xxx<br />
Enter the DNS domain name. Enter an<br />
address<br />
within 255<br />
characters.<br />
4.7 E-mail Printing<br />
Settings to<br />
define based<br />
on the protocol<br />
SMTP POP3<br />
: Must set<br />
— : No need to set<br />
3 Scroll down the frame and click Apply New Settings, and then on the<br />
displayed screen, click Reboot.<br />
4 Configure the setting of the items in the following table to match the Email<br />
Printing environment.<br />
—<br />
—<br />
—<br />
Special Printing<br />
4<br />
93
Special Printing<br />
4<br />
94<br />
4.7 E-mail Printing<br />
Item in the<br />
frame<br />
E-mail under<br />
Protocol Settings<br />
Item Description Value<br />
Receiving<br />
Protocol<br />
Print Mail<br />
Headers and<br />
Contents<br />
POP3 Server<br />
Address<br />
POP3 Server<br />
Check Interval<br />
POP <strong>User</strong><br />
Name<br />
POP <strong>User</strong><br />
Password<br />
STMP SendingAuthentication<br />
STMP Server<br />
Address<br />
Sets how the mail is to be received to<br />
match your environment.<br />
Sets the contents to be printed when<br />
printing both the received mail and<br />
the header of the e-mail. Select All<br />
Headers and Contents when you<br />
want to print all items of the email.<br />
Sets the POP3 server address for<br />
receiving the mail.<br />
Sets the interval to check mail in the<br />
POP3 server.<br />
Sets the user name for connecting to<br />
the POP3 server. Only one user can<br />
be set.<br />
Sets the password for each user<br />
name and enter the same password<br />
again at the Confirm Password box.<br />
Allows you to confirm the user at the<br />
POP server before sending e-mails<br />
to the SMTP server. Check valid in<br />
the checkbox.<br />
*SMTP,<br />
POP3<br />
*Basic<br />
Headers<br />
and Contents,<br />
None,<br />
Based on<br />
Comment,<br />
All Headers<br />
and Contents<br />
Up to 128<br />
characters<br />
can be<br />
entered,<br />
including “.”<br />
(full stop)<br />
and “-”<br />
(hyphen).<br />
1 to 120<br />
minutes<br />
*10 minutes<br />
Enter each<br />
name within<br />
64 characters.<br />
Enter a<br />
password<br />
within 64<br />
characters.<br />
Invalid*<br />
Valid<br />
Set the SMTP server address. Up to 128<br />
characters can<br />
be entered,<br />
including “.”<br />
and “-”.<br />
* : default values<br />
Settings to<br />
define based<br />
on the protocol<br />
SMTP POP3<br />
—<br />
—<br />
—<br />
—<br />
: Must set<br />
— : No need to set
4.7 E-mail Printing<br />
5 Scroll down the frame and click Apply New Settings, and then on the<br />
displayed screen, click Reboot.<br />
4.7.2 Sending E-mail<br />
Procedure<br />
This section describes how to send mails to the machine from the computer<br />
using Outlook Express as an example.<br />
1 Using your e-mail software, create a mail and then attach a TIFF or<br />
PDF document, if available.<br />
● If the file format of the attached document is not “.tif” nor “.pdf”, you might not be able to print<br />
correctly.<br />
● Up to 31 documents can be attached.<br />
2 Enter the e-mail address of the receiving machine.<br />
Special Printing<br />
4<br />
95
Special Printing<br />
4<br />
96<br />
4.7 E-mail Printing<br />
3 Send the e-mail.<br />
After the e-mail has been received at the machine, it will be automatically printed.<br />
The e-mail itself and the attached document will be printed at the machine based on the following settings:<br />
● The e-mail itself:<br />
Default values of the PCL printer driver<br />
● The attached TIFF document:<br />
Default values of the logical printer settings for TIFF of the Emulation Settings of CentreWare<br />
Internet Services.<br />
● The attached PDF document:<br />
Default values of the logical printer settings for PostScript of the Emulation Settings of CentreWare<br />
Internet Services.
4.8<br />
Notify Job End by E-mail<br />
You can configure an e-mail to be sent to the computer to notify that a job has ended.<br />
Here, we use Wordpad of Windows 98 as an example. The procedure is the same when<br />
using other OS.<br />
4.8.1 System Environment<br />
The following settings have to be configured in order to use the Mail Notification<br />
feature. Check with your system administrator or network administrator on<br />
whether these settings have been configured.<br />
Network Environment and Mail Environment Settings<br />
● Register the user account.<br />
● Set the Mail Environment.<br />
“4.7 E-mail Printing” (P. 91) for details on Setting Mail Environment.<br />
Mail Notification Environment Setting<br />
Procedure<br />
Using CentreWare Internet Services, configure the setting for using the Mail<br />
Notification feature.<br />
1 Activate CentreWare Internet Services and then click Properties.<br />
“5.4 Activating” (P. 113) for details on activating CentreWare Internet Services.<br />
Special Printing<br />
4<br />
97
Special Printing<br />
4<br />
98<br />
4.8 Notify Job End by E-mail<br />
2 From the left frame of the screen displayed, select Port Status.<br />
3 Check the Enable check box of Mail Notice.<br />
4 Click Apply New Settings.<br />
If a message prompts for the user name and password, enter these items and then click OK. If a message<br />
prompts for the machine to be reboot, switch off the power of the machine and then on again.
4.8 Notify Job End by E-mail<br />
5 If the machine has been reboot, check that it has been activated and<br />
then select Mail Notice Settings from the left frame.<br />
If necessary, configure setting for other items.<br />
6 Scroll down the frame and click Apply New Settings. If a message<br />
prompts for the user name and password, enter these items and then<br />
click OK. If a message prompts for the machine to be reboot, switch off<br />
the power of the machine and then on again.<br />
4.8.2 Notifying by E-mail<br />
Procedure<br />
Here, we use Wordpad of Windows 98 as an example. The procedure is the<br />
same when using other OS.<br />
1 From the Start menu, select Settings and then click <strong>Printer</strong>s to display<br />
the printer properties dialog box.<br />
2 Click the Configuration tab.<br />
Special Printing<br />
4<br />
99
Special Printing<br />
4<br />
100<br />
4.8 Notify Job End by E-mail<br />
3 Select Notify Job End by E-mail from the Print Features list box.<br />
4 Select On from the Notify Job End by E-mail drop-down list box.<br />
5 Enter an e-mail address at the Mail Address box.<br />
6 Click OK.
4.9<br />
Adding Banner Sheet for<br />
Printing<br />
During printing, you can add paper used for sorting/classifying (banner sheet) to differentiate<br />
a printed sheet from the rest.<br />
You can configure the setting for the banner sheet on this machine.<br />
● Banner sheets are not stapled when the staple feature has been set.<br />
● The number of banner sheet printed will be added to the meter.<br />
“5.7.2 Others (Print Mode Settings)” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier) for details on setting banner<br />
sheet.<br />
Special Printing<br />
4<br />
101
Special Printing<br />
4<br />
102<br />
4.10<br />
File Upload Printing<br />
You can print a TIFF file or a PDF file by uploading files to the machine using a browser.<br />
Procedure<br />
1 Activate CentreWare Internet Services and then click Services.<br />
“5.4 Activating” for details on actibating CentreWare Internet Services.<br />
2 Click Browse in the File Name group.<br />
The Choose file dialog box appears.<br />
3 In the Choose file dialog box, specify a file on the computer.<br />
4 If necessary, set the other settings in the window.
5 Click Start to start printing.<br />
4.10 File Upload Printing<br />
Special Printing<br />
4<br />
103
5Configuring From<br />
Computer (CentreWare<br />
Internet Services)<br />
5.1 About CentreWare Internet Services ............................................. 106<br />
5.1.1 Introduction..................................................................... 106<br />
5.1.2 Structure Screen............................................................. 107<br />
5.1.3 System Structure ............................................................ 108<br />
5.1.4 Target OS and Browsers................................................. 109<br />
5.2 Configuring Browser ...................................................................... 110<br />
5.2.1 For Netscape Communicator.......................................... 110<br />
5.2.2 For Internet Explorer....................................................... 110<br />
5.2.3 Proxy Server and Port Number....................................... 111<br />
5.3 Configuring Machine...................................................................... 112<br />
5.4 Activating ....................................................................................... 113<br />
5.5 Troubleshooting.............................................................................. 114
Configuring From Computer (CentreWare Internet Services)<br />
5<br />
106<br />
5.1<br />
5.1.1 Introduction<br />
About CentreWare Internet<br />
Services<br />
CentreWare Internet Services is a software that enables you to use a web<br />
browser to display the printer/job status or change the settings of this machine<br />
when it has been configured for use in TCP/IP environment.<br />
Among the items that can be set through the touch panel display for this machine<br />
to be used as a printer, you can use the Properties screen of this software to set<br />
items like system setting as well as the setting of each network port.<br />
“Chapter 5 System Administration Mode Settings” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier)<br />
for details on items that can be set through the touch panel display.<br />
Depending on the item, some settings become effective only after rebooting (i.e. switching off/on the<br />
machine or defining the system setting using the printer control panel).<br />
The main features of each tab of CentreWare Internet Services are as follows:<br />
Tab Main Features<br />
● Services Allows you to configure settings and print documents stored in your<br />
computer.<br />
● Jobs Displays the job list/job history and deletes jobs.<br />
● Status Displays the host device status.<br />
● Displays the status of paper tray/output tray, as well as consumables<br />
like toner.<br />
● Properties Displays or configures the following items: machine details and date/<br />
time settings; configuration settings like memory and printer language;<br />
counter settings; paper trays setting; paper settings; save energy mode<br />
settings; fax list settings; mailbox settings; mail notice settings; Internet<br />
services settings; port status settings.<br />
● Sets every port.<br />
● Sets every protocol.<br />
● Sets emulation.<br />
● Sets memory.<br />
Maintenance ● Displays error history report.<br />
Support ● Displays support information.
5.1.2 Structure Screen<br />
5.1 About CentreWare Internet Services<br />
The CentreWare Internet Services screen is made up of four frames (partitioned<br />
screens).<br />
There is a frame at the top and bottom of the window, that is as wide as the<br />
browser, as well as two between these, which are on the left and right. The contents<br />
displayed on each frame change according to the features used (Jobs, Status,<br />
Properties, Maintenance, Support).<br />
Clicking the Help button at the bottom frame will display the On-line Help file containing explanations<br />
on CentreWare Internet Services.<br />
Left frame<br />
Top frame<br />
The frame displayed at the top of the window. By default, a logo mark and the<br />
printer name will be displayed. Besides the logo mark and machine name, each<br />
feature page will display a link to the top page as well as tabs for moving to each<br />
feature.<br />
Bottom frame<br />
Top frame<br />
Right frame<br />
Bottom frame<br />
Usually, it displays the links to the Home Page of our company, the copyright<br />
screen and the Help file. The contents in this frame remain unchanged regardless<br />
of the page that is being displayed.<br />
Click the Help button to display the Help file for details on each of the features of<br />
CentreWare Internet Services.<br />
Configuring From Computer (CentreWare Internet Services)<br />
5<br />
107
Configuring From Computer (CentreWare Internet Services)<br />
5<br />
108<br />
5.1 About CentreWare Internet Services<br />
Right and left frames<br />
The contents in these frames will change according to the features selected. The<br />
items that can be set as well as information on them will be displayed in these<br />
frames once a feature is selected.<br />
You can drag the line separating the left and right frames to change their size of these frames. The<br />
position of the line separating the top and bottom frames cannot be changed.<br />
5.1.3 System Structure<br />
To use CentreWare Internet Services, you need to activate an environment<br />
using TCP/IP and enable this software on the machine.
5.1.4 Target OS and Browsers<br />
5.1 About CentreWare Internet Services<br />
The OS and browsers that can be used for CentreWare Internet Services are as<br />
follows:<br />
Target OS<br />
● Microsoft Windows 95 (Service Pack 1 or later)<br />
● Microsoft Windows 98<br />
● Microsoft Windows 98 Second Edition<br />
● Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition<br />
● Microsoft Windows NT Workstation 4.0 (Service Pack 4 or later)<br />
● Microsoft Windows NT Server 4.0 (Service Pack 4 or later)<br />
● Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional (with Service Pack 2)<br />
● Microsoft Windows 2000 Server (with Service Pack 2)<br />
● Microsoft Windows XP Professional Edition<br />
● Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition<br />
● Mac OS 8.0 or later<br />
Browsers<br />
■For Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0, Windows<br />
2000, Windows XP:<br />
● Netscape Communicator ver. 4.51 or later<br />
● Internet Explorer ver. 4.01SP2 or later<br />
■For Macintosh:<br />
● Netscape Communicator ver. 4.5 or later<br />
● Internet Explorer ver. 5.0 or later<br />
Configuring From Computer (CentreWare Internet Services)<br />
5<br />
109
Configuring From Computer (CentreWare Internet Services)<br />
5<br />
110<br />
5.2<br />
Configuring Browser<br />
Before using CentreWare Internet Services, check the following settings for the browser to<br />
be used:<br />
5.2.1 For Netscape Communicator<br />
Procedure<br />
Here, we use Netscape Communicator 4.51 of Windows NT 4.0 as an example.<br />
1 From the Edit menu, select Preferences.<br />
2 From the Category tree, select Advanced.<br />
3 Click the sign on the left of Advanced.<br />
4 Click Cache under Advanced.<br />
5 Click Once per session or Every time for Document in cache is compared<br />
to document on network.<br />
6 Click OK.<br />
5.2.2 For Internet Explorer<br />
Procedure<br />
Here, we use Internet Explorer 5.5 of Windows NT 4.0 as an example.<br />
1 Select Internet Options from the Display menu for version 4.x, and<br />
Internet Options from the Tools menu for version 5.x.<br />
2 Click Settings for Temporary Internet files on the General tab.<br />
3 For Check for newer versions of stored pages on the Settings tab,<br />
select either Every visit to the page or Every time you start Internet<br />
Explorer.<br />
4 Click OK.
5.2.3 Proxy Server and Port Number<br />
5.2 Configuring Browser<br />
You also need to check the proxy server setting and port number before using<br />
CentreWare Internet Services.<br />
Proxy server setting<br />
When using CentreWare Internet Services, it is recommended to make direct<br />
connection without going through a proxy server.<br />
When connection has been made through a proxy server, it might take a long time to set the IP address<br />
using the browser and the screen might not be displayed. When this happens, you have to set the IP<br />
address at the browser without going through a proxy server. For details on how to define these settings,<br />
see the manual of the browser that you are using.<br />
Port number setting<br />
The default port number of CentreWare Internet Services is “80”. The port number<br />
can be changed on the Properties screen > Protocol Settings > HTTP. The<br />
port numbers that can be set are “80” or “8,000” to “9,999”.<br />
To enter the port number at the browser after it has been changed, you have to<br />
add a “:” after the IP address or Internet address before adding it.<br />
For example, specify the port number as follows after it has been defined as<br />
“8080”:<br />
http://IP address: 8080<br />
or<br />
http://Internet address: 8080<br />
The port number can be checked under the Communication Settings item on the System Settings List.<br />
For details on printing the System Settings List, see “6.6 Printing Reports/Lists” in “Part 1 Hardware”<br />
of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier).<br />
Configuring From Computer (CentreWare Internet Services)<br />
5<br />
111
Configuring From Computer (CentreWare Internet Services)<br />
5<br />
112<br />
5.3<br />
Configuring Machine<br />
To use CentreWare Internet Services, you have to set the following items using the touch<br />
panel display:<br />
● IP address and if necessary, subnet mask and gateway address<br />
● Internet Services to Enabled (default: Disabled)<br />
● “1.3 Setting IP Address” (P. 13) for details on setting IP address.<br />
● “1.4 Setting Port” (P. 18) for details on setting the port.
5.4 Activating<br />
This section describes the steps you have to carry out on the host device in order to use<br />
CentreWare Internet Services.<br />
Procedure<br />
1 Activate the host device, and then the browser.<br />
2 Enter the IP address or host name of this machine at the address column<br />
of the browser, and then press Enter on the keyboard.<br />
Check with the system administrator on the IP address and host name to be entered.<br />
■Example of specifying IP address<br />
■Example of specifying host name<br />
When specifying a port number, add “:” after the address, followed by “80” (default port number).<br />
The CentreWare Internet Services screen will be displayed.<br />
Configuring From Computer (CentreWare Internet Services)<br />
5<br />
113
Configuring From Computer (CentreWare Internet Services)<br />
5<br />
114<br />
5.5 Troubleshooting<br />
On the Jobs and Maintenance screens, the detailed status of the print jobs specified for<br />
each of the interface and on the printer control panel will be displayed.<br />
Cause Action<br />
Cannot connect to CentreWare<br />
Internet Services.<br />
The “Please wait” message is<br />
displayed throughout at the<br />
browser.<br />
Is the machine working properly?<br />
Check if the power of the machine is switched on.<br />
Is CentreWare Internet Services activated? Print out the System<br />
Settings List to check.<br />
Is the Internet address correctly entered?<br />
Check the Internet address again. If cannot be connected, enter the<br />
IP address to make connection.<br />
Is the proxy server being used?<br />
Depending on the proxy server, connections might not be possible.<br />
Without using the proxy server, configure either the browser setting<br />
to one without using proxy server or the address to be connected to<br />
one without using proxy server.<br />
Is the Ethernet cable properly connected?<br />
Check that the Ethernet cable of the computer and machine is properly<br />
connected.<br />
Just for a while as instructed.<br />
If nothing happens, try clicking the Refresh button of the browser. If<br />
nothing happens, check if the machine is working properly.<br />
The Refresh button is not working.<br />
Are you using the specified OS and browser?<br />
Selecting menu in the left frame<br />
does not change the right frame<br />
contents.<br />
See “5.1 About CentreWare Internet Services” (P. 106), and check if<br />
the OS and browser you are using can be used.<br />
The screen display is distorted. Change the window size of the browser.<br />
The latest information is not displayed.<br />
Click the Refresh button.<br />
Clicking the Apply New Settings<br />
button does not change anything.<br />
Clicking the Apply New Settings<br />
button will display in the<br />
browser, messages like “No<br />
data.” or “The server has<br />
returned ineffective or unrecognizable<br />
response.”<br />
Is the entered value correct?<br />
If the entered value is not a valid entry, it will change automatically to<br />
an entry within the limit.<br />
Are the user name and password correct?<br />
Enter the correct user name and password.<br />
Reboot the machine.
Part 2 <strong>Scanner</strong>
1Setting <strong>Scanner</strong><br />
Environment<br />
1.1 <strong>Scanner</strong> Environment .................................................................... 118<br />
1.1.1 Scanning With the Mailbox ............................................. 118<br />
1.1.2 Scanning Services With Job Template ........................... 119<br />
1.2 Flow of Configuring Scanning ........................................................ 120<br />
1.3 Using Scan Features...................................................................... 121<br />
1.3.1 Target OS and System Environment .............................. 121<br />
1.3.2 Connecting Cable ........................................................... 121<br />
1.4 Configuring for Using Mailbox ........................................................ 122<br />
1.4.1 Setting IP Address.......................................................... 122<br />
1.4.2 Activating Port for Scanning (Salutation) ........................ 122<br />
1.4.3 Creating Mailbox............................................................. 127<br />
1.5 Configuring for Using Job Template............................................... 133<br />
1.5.1 Setting IP Address.......................................................... 133<br />
1.5.2 Activating FTP Client ...................................................... 133<br />
1.6 Configuring Computer.................................................................... 138<br />
1.6.1 Using Mailbox ................................................................. 138<br />
1.6.2 Using Job Template ........................................................ 138<br />
1.7 Installing the Network <strong>Scanner</strong> Utility ............................................ 139<br />
1.7.1 Required Environment .................................................... 139<br />
1.7.2 Installation ...................................................................... 140<br />
1.7.3 Uninstallation .................................................................. 142
Setting <strong>Scanner</strong> Environment 118<br />
1<br />
1.1<br />
<strong>Scanner</strong> Environment<br />
This machine has two types of scanner function:<br />
● <strong>Scanner</strong> function using mailbox<br />
● <strong>Scanner</strong> function using Job Template<br />
The following describes the summary of each scan feature.<br />
1.1.1 Scanning With the Mailbox<br />
The scanner function using mailbox is available in this machine when you connect<br />
it to a network environment using TCP/IP protocol.<br />
Scan the desired document as data using this machine and store it in the mailbox.<br />
The stored document can be retrieved from a computer connected to the<br />
network.<br />
Besides scanned documents, you can also retrieve from the mailbox, faxed documents<br />
received from other facsimile.
1.1 <strong>Scanner</strong> Environment<br />
1.1.2 Scanning Services With Job Template<br />
Specify a file with configured conditions (known as Job Template) and scan the<br />
necessary document with this machine. The scanned document will be saved to<br />
the hard disk of this machine and then sent automatically to the computer<br />
(server) connected to the network. You need to use the optional CentreWare<br />
Scanning Services to create the Job Template.<br />
When using Job Template, only the necessary processes on this machine will be explained in this<br />
guide. Help for CentreWare Internet Services or the “CentreWare Scanning Services Installation<br />
<strong>Guide</strong>” for information on the operations that need to be done on the computer.<br />
Setting <strong>Scanner</strong> Environment 1<br />
119
Setting <strong>Scanner</strong> Environment 120<br />
1<br />
1.2<br />
Flow of Configuring<br />
Scanning<br />
The flow of configuring the scanning functions is as follows:<br />
Before setting the scan features, check that this machine is connected to the network by network cable. For details on<br />
connecting to the network, see “Chapter 2 Setting up Network” (P. 25) in “Part 1 <strong>Printer</strong>”.
1.3<br />
Using Scan Features<br />
This section describes the essential environment for using the scan feature.<br />
1.3.1 Target OS and System Environment<br />
The essential conditions for scanning using either the mailbox or Job Template<br />
are as follows:<br />
CentreWare Scanning Services Installation <strong>Guide</strong> for details on the target OS and system environment<br />
when using CentreWare Scanning Services.<br />
Target OS<br />
● Microsoft Windows 95 (Service Pack 1 or later)<br />
● Microsoft Windows 98<br />
● Microsoft Windows 98 Second Edition<br />
● Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition<br />
● Microsoft Windows NT Workstation 4.0 (Service Pack 4 or later)<br />
● Microsoft Windows NT Server 4.0 (Service Pack 4 or later)<br />
● Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional (with Service Pack 2 and Service Pack<br />
3)<br />
● Microsoft Windows 2000 Server (with Service Pack 2 and Service Pack 3)<br />
● Microsoft Windows XP Professional Edition<br />
● Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition<br />
Microsoft Windows NT Server 4.0 Terminal Server Edition, Microsoft Windows 2000 Server Terminal<br />
Services, Microsoft Windows 2000 Advanced Server Terminal Services, and Windows XP Remote<br />
Desktop cannot be used as the target OS.<br />
Network<br />
This machine and the computer must be connected to a network and be able to<br />
communicate by TCP/IP protocol.<br />
1.3.2 Connecting Cable<br />
Connect this machine to a network using interface cable.<br />
For details on connecting interface cable, see “1.2 Connecting Interface Cable” (P. 10) in “Part 1<br />
<strong>Printer</strong>”.<br />
Setting <strong>Scanner</strong> Environment<br />
1<br />
121
Setting <strong>Scanner</strong> Environment 122<br />
1<br />
1.4<br />
Configuring for Using<br />
Mailbox<br />
To scan with the mailbox, configure the following settings on this machine:<br />
● set IP address<br />
● activate the port for scanning (salutation)<br />
● create a mailbox for saving scanned documents<br />
1.4.1 Setting IP Address<br />
For details on setting IP address, see “1.3 Setting IP Address” (P. 13) in “Part 1<br />
<strong>Printer</strong>”.<br />
If an IP address has already been set for the printing function, you do not need to<br />
do any setting here.<br />
1.4.2 Activating Port for Scanning (Salutation)<br />
This section describes the procedure to set the port for scanning (salutation) to<br />
Enabled (default: Disabled).<br />
You can activate the port by using either the System Administration Mode<br />
through the touch panel display or the CentreWare Internet Services.<br />
● “Chapter 5 System Administration Mode Settings” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong><br />
(Copier) for details on System Administration Mode.<br />
● “5.6.1 Port Settings” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier) for details on the ports that<br />
can be set.<br />
● “Chapter 5 Configuring From Computer (CentreWare Internet Services)” (P. 105) in “Part 1<br />
<strong>Printer</strong>” for details on CentreWare Internet Services.<br />
The following describes the procedure of using System Administration Mode as<br />
an example.
Procedure<br />
1.4 Configuring for Using Mailbox<br />
1 On the control panel, press Password/System Settings.<br />
Either the System Administrator Menu screen or System Administrator – Password Entry screen will<br />
be displayed.<br />
If the System Administrator Menu screen is displayed, proceed to step 2.<br />
System Administrator Menu<br />
If the System Administrator – Password Entry screen is displayed, see “5.2.1 Entering the System<br />
Administration Mode” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier) for details on entering the<br />
password.<br />
<br />
2 On the screen, select System Settings.<br />
System Administrator Menu<br />
The System Settings screen is displayed.<br />
<strong>User</strong> Mode System Settings<br />
<br />
<br />
<strong>User</strong> Mode System Settings<br />
<br />
Setting <strong>Scanner</strong> Environment 1<br />
123
Setting <strong>Scanner</strong> Environment 1<br />
124<br />
1.4 Configuring for Using Mailbox<br />
3 Select System Settings.<br />
System Settings<br />
System Settings<br />
Auditron<br />
Administration<br />
The System Settings screen is displayed.<br />
4 Select Network Settings.<br />
System Settings<br />
The Network Settings screen is displayed.<br />
5 Select Port Settings.<br />
The Port Settings screen is displayed.<br />
Setup Menu<br />
Close<br />
System Administrator<br />
Password<br />
Close<br />
Common Settings Copy Mode Settings Network Settings<br />
Print Mode Settings<br />
<br />
Scan Mode Settings
1.4 Configuring for Using Mailbox<br />
6 Select to display the next screen, and check Current Settings for<br />
Salutation on the screen.<br />
If it is Enabled, there is no need to do any setting. Proceed to step 11.<br />
Port Settings<br />
Items Current Settings<br />
6. EtherTalk<br />
Disabled<br />
7. Salutation<br />
Disabled<br />
8. Port 9100<br />
Disabled<br />
9. SNMP<br />
Disabled<br />
10. FTP Client Disabled<br />
For the remaining steps, Salutation is assumed to be Disabled in this example.<br />
7 Select Salutation and then Change Settings.<br />
Port Settings<br />
Items Current Settings<br />
6. EtherTalk<br />
Disabled<br />
7. Salutation<br />
Disabled<br />
8. Port 9100<br />
Disabled<br />
9. SNMP<br />
Disabled<br />
10. FTP Client Disabled<br />
The Salutation screen is displayed.<br />
8 Select Port Status and then Change Settings.<br />
Salutation<br />
Items Current Settings<br />
1. Port Status Disabled<br />
The Salutation - Port Status screen is displayed.<br />
2/3<br />
2/3<br />
Close<br />
Change<br />
Settings<br />
Close<br />
Change<br />
Settings<br />
Close<br />
Change<br />
Settings<br />
Setting <strong>Scanner</strong> Environment 1<br />
125
Setting <strong>Scanner</strong> Environment 1<br />
126<br />
1.4 Configuring for Using Mailbox<br />
9 Select Enable and then Save.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
The Salutation screen is displayed.<br />
10 Check that Current Settings for Port Status is Enabled and then select<br />
Close.<br />
Salutation<br />
Items Current Settings<br />
1. Port Status Enabled<br />
The Port Settings screen is displayed.<br />
<br />
11 Select Close repeatedly until the System Settings screen is displayed.<br />
12 Select Close.<br />
The machine will reboot and the display will return to the previous screen prior to this procedure.<br />
Press the Features button on the control panel, and then on the screen, check that Scan is displayed on<br />
the Menu screen.<br />
<br />
Close<br />
Change<br />
Settings
1.4.3 Creating Mailbox<br />
1.4 Configuring for Using Mailbox<br />
This section describes how to create a mailbox to save scanned documents.<br />
You can use either the touch panel display or CentreWare Internet Services to<br />
create a mailbox.<br />
You can retrieve documents in the mailbox to an application program from a<br />
computer using the scanner driver.<br />
Up to 200 mailboxes can be created and the settings or options that can be<br />
changed are as follows:<br />
● Mailbox Name<br />
Sets the name of the mailbox. Up to 10 characters can be used.<br />
● Password<br />
Sets the mailbox password within 20 digits. You can configure settings without<br />
the password. This password will be effective only if the System Administrator’s<br />
password has been enabled.<br />
● Check Password<br />
Sets whether to check password for every sending and retrieving of faxes in<br />
the mailbox when the password has been set.<br />
● Delete/Save Documents<br />
Sets whether to delete mailbox documents automatically after receiving or<br />
printing the documents.<br />
When the fax feature has been installed, the options available for setting will be displayed with Mailbox<br />
Options(Fax Doc.). For details on the contents of the options, see “9.6 Creating a Mailbox” in the<br />
<strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Facsimile).<br />
“Chapter 5 Configuring From Computer (CentreWare Internet Services)” (P. 105) in “Part 1<br />
<strong>Printer</strong>” for details on CentreWare Internet Services.<br />
Setting <strong>Scanner</strong> Environment 1<br />
127
Setting <strong>Scanner</strong> Environment 1<br />
128<br />
1.4 Configuring for Using Mailbox<br />
Procedure<br />
The following describes the procedure of using the touch panel display as an<br />
example.<br />
1 On the control panel, press Password/System Settings.<br />
Either the System Administrator Menu screen or System Administrator – Password Entry screen will<br />
be displayed.<br />
If the System Administrator Menu screen is displayed, proceed to step 2.<br />
System Administrator Menu<br />
If the System Administrator – Password Entry screen is displayed, see “5.2.1 Entering the System<br />
Administration Mode” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier) for details on entering the<br />
password.<br />
<br />
2 On the screen, select System Settings.<br />
System Administrator Menu<br />
The System Settings screen is displayed.<br />
<strong>User</strong> Mode System Settings<br />
<br />
<br />
<strong>User</strong> Mode System Settings
3 Select Setup Menu.<br />
System Settings<br />
System Settings<br />
Auditron<br />
Administration<br />
The Setup Menu screen is displayed.<br />
4 Select Mailbox.<br />
Setup Menu<br />
Mailbox<br />
The Mailbox screen is displayed.<br />
Setup Menu<br />
5 Select the preferred box, followed by Create/Delete.<br />
Mailbox not in use yet will be displayed as “(Not in Use)”.<br />
Mailbox<br />
No. Mailbox Name<br />
001 (Not in Use)<br />
002 (Not in Use)<br />
003 (Not in Use)<br />
004 (Not in Use)<br />
005 (Not in Use)<br />
The Mailbox – Assign Password screen is displayed.<br />
Mailbox - Assign Password<br />
Off<br />
On<br />
Password<br />
Cancel<br />
1.4 Configuring for Using Mailbox<br />
Close<br />
System Administrator<br />
Password<br />
Close<br />
Close<br />
Go to<br />
(001 - 200)<br />
Create/Delete<br />
Save<br />
Setting <strong>Scanner</strong> Environment 1<br />
129
Setting <strong>Scanner</strong> Environment 1<br />
130<br />
1.4 Configuring for Using Mailbox<br />
6 Set the password.<br />
■When setting password<br />
1 Select On.<br />
2 Using the numeric keypad, enter a password within 20 characters, and<br />
then select Save.<br />
1<br />
The Mailbox xxx – Create/Delete screen is displayed. xxx refers to the mailbox<br />
number.<br />
The entered password will be displayed as “∗”. To correct a wrongly entered value, press the C button<br />
on the control panel, and then re-enter.<br />
Mailbox - Assign Password<br />
Off<br />
On<br />
■When not setting password<br />
Select Off and then Save.<br />
Password<br />
Cancel<br />
The Mailbox xxx – Create/Delete screen is displayed. xxx refers to the mailbox<br />
number.<br />
7 If necessary, configure the settings for Mailbox Name, Check Password<br />
and Delete/Save Documents. Select the option to be set, followed by<br />
Change Settings. Select Save once the settings are done.<br />
Mailbox 001 - Create/Delete<br />
Items Current Settings<br />
1. Mailbox Name<br />
(Not Set)<br />
2. Password<br />
On<br />
3. Check Password<br />
Always<br />
4. Delete/Save Documents Delete<br />
Save<br />
Close<br />
Delete Mailbox<br />
Change<br />
Settings
■Mailbox Name<br />
Sets the name of the mailbox. Up to 10 characters can be used.<br />
The display might differ according to the ROM versions.<br />
Alphanumeric<br />
Symbol<br />
a b c d e f g<br />
h j j k l m n<br />
o p q r s<br />
v w x<br />
Cancel<br />
1.4 Configuring for Using Mailbox<br />
● Entering alphanumeric character: Select Alphanumeric and then the characters.<br />
Selecting Shift will change the display<br />
to capital or small letters.<br />
● Entering symbol: Select Symbol and then the character, followed<br />
by Save.<br />
● Entering space: Select Space.<br />
● Deleting one character: Select Backspace.<br />
■Check Password<br />
Sets whether to check password for every sending and retrieving of faxes in the<br />
mailbox when the password has been set.<br />
3. Check Password<br />
Save<br />
(Write)<br />
Print/Delete<br />
(Read)<br />
Always<br />
y z<br />
t u<br />
1 2<br />
4 5<br />
7 8<br />
● Save (Write): Select this if you want a password to be entered<br />
when selecting a mailbox.<br />
● Print/Delete (Read): Select this if you want a password to be entered<br />
when printing/deleting mailbox document.<br />
● Always: Select this if you want a password to be entered<br />
when processing both of the above actions.<br />
0<br />
3<br />
6<br />
9<br />
Cancel<br />
The user will be required to enter the password<br />
when certain operations are selected.<br />
In order for this feature to function, you need to<br />
set the System Administrator Password to On.<br />
If not, the user password entry screen will not be<br />
displayed.<br />
Save<br />
Backspace<br />
Space<br />
Shift<br />
Save<br />
Setting <strong>Scanner</strong> Environment 1<br />
131
Setting <strong>Scanner</strong> Environment 1<br />
132<br />
1.4 Configuring for Using Mailbox<br />
■Delete/Save Documents<br />
Sets whether to delete documents when they have been retrieved from the mailbox<br />
and printed.<br />
4. Delete/Save Documents<br />
Save<br />
Delete<br />
● Save: Select this to save the document and the document<br />
is not deleted.<br />
● Delete: Select this to delete the document.<br />
8 Check the selection on the Mailbox 001 - Create/Delete screen and<br />
then select Close.<br />
The Mailbox screen is displayed.<br />
Delete documents from the Mailbox once<br />
they have been retrieved by an external<br />
source or after printing.<br />
Mailbox 001 - Create/Delete<br />
Items Current Setting<br />
1. Mailbox Name<br />
report<br />
2. Password<br />
On<br />
3. Check Password<br />
Always<br />
4. Delete/Save Documents Delete<br />
Cancel<br />
9 Select Close repeatedly until the System Settings screen is displayed.<br />
10 Select Close.<br />
The unit will exit the System Administration Mode.<br />
Save<br />
Close<br />
Delete Mailbox<br />
Change<br />
Settings
1.5<br />
Configuring for Using Job<br />
Template<br />
To scan with Job Template, configure the following settings on this machine:<br />
● set IP address.<br />
● activate FTP client for using Job Template.<br />
1.5.1 Setting IP Address<br />
For details on setting IP address, see “1.3 Setting IP Address” (P. 13) in “Part 1<br />
<strong>Printer</strong>”.<br />
If an IP address has already been set for the printing function, you do not need to<br />
do any setting here.<br />
1.5.2 Activating FTP Client<br />
The following procedure describes how to set the FTP client for using Job Template<br />
to Enabled (default: Disabled).<br />
You can activate the port by using either the System Administration Mode<br />
through the touch panel display or the CentreWare Internet Services.<br />
● “Chapter 5 System Administration Mode Settings” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong><br />
(Copier) for details on System Administration Mode.<br />
● “5.6.1 Port Settings” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier) for details on the ports that<br />
can be set.<br />
● “Chapter 5 Configuring From Computer (CentreWare Internet Services)” (P. 105) in “Part 1<br />
<strong>Printer</strong>” for details on CentreWare Internet Services.<br />
The following describes the procedure of using System Administration Mode as<br />
an example.<br />
Setting <strong>Scanner</strong> Environment<br />
1<br />
133
Setting <strong>Scanner</strong> Environment 1<br />
134<br />
1.5 Configuring for Using Job Template<br />
Procedure<br />
1 On the control panel, press Password/System Settings.<br />
Either the System Administrator Menu screen or System Administrator – Password Entry screen will<br />
be displayed.<br />
If the System Administrator Menu screen is displayed, proceed to step 2.<br />
System Administrator Menu<br />
If the System Administrator – Password Entry screen is displayed, see “5.2.1 Entering the System<br />
Administration Mode” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier) for details on entering the<br />
password.<br />
<br />
2 On the screen, select System Settings.<br />
System Administrator Menu<br />
The System Settings screen is displayed.<br />
<strong>User</strong> Mode System Settings<br />
<br />
<br />
<strong>User</strong> Mode System Settings
3 Select System Settings.<br />
System Settings<br />
System Settings<br />
Auditron<br />
Administration<br />
The System Settings screen is displayed.<br />
4 Select Network Settings.<br />
System Settings<br />
The Network Settings screen is displayed.<br />
5 Select Port Settings.<br />
The Port Settings screen is displayed.<br />
Setup Menu<br />
1.5 Configuring for Using Job Template<br />
Close<br />
System Administrator<br />
Password<br />
Close<br />
Common Settings Copy Mode Settings Network Settings<br />
Print Mode Settings<br />
<br />
Scan Mode Settings<br />
<br />
<br />
Setting <strong>Scanner</strong> Environment 1<br />
135
Setting <strong>Scanner</strong> Environment 1<br />
136<br />
1.5 Configuring for Using Job Template<br />
6 Select to display the next screen, and check Current Settings for<br />
FTP Client on the screen.<br />
If it is Enabled, there is no need to do any setting. Proceed to step 11.<br />
Port Settings<br />
Items Current Settings<br />
6. EtherTalk<br />
Disabled<br />
7. Salutation<br />
Disabled<br />
8. Port 9100<br />
Disabled<br />
9. SNMP<br />
Disabled<br />
10. FTP Client Disabled<br />
For the remaining steps, FTP Client is assumed to be Disabled in this example.<br />
7 Select FTP Client and then Change Settings.<br />
Port Settings<br />
Items Current Settings<br />
6. EtherTalk<br />
Disabled<br />
7. Salutation<br />
Disabled<br />
8. Port 9100<br />
Disabled<br />
9. SNMP<br />
Disabled<br />
10. FTP Client Disabled<br />
The FTP Client screen is displayed.<br />
8 Select Port Status and then Change Settings.<br />
FTP Client<br />
Items Current Settings<br />
1. Port Status Disabled<br />
The FTP Client - Port Status screen is displayed.<br />
2/3<br />
2/3<br />
Close<br />
Change<br />
Settings<br />
Close<br />
Change<br />
Settings<br />
Close<br />
Change<br />
Settings
9 Select Enable and then Save.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
The FTP Client screen is displayed.<br />
1.5 Configuring for Using Job Template<br />
10 Check that Current Settings for Port Status is Enabled and then select<br />
Close.<br />
FTP Client<br />
Items Current Settings<br />
1. Port Status Enabled<br />
The Port Settings screen is displayed.<br />
<br />
11 Select Close repeatedly until the System Settings screen is displayed.<br />
12 Select Close.<br />
The machine will reboot and the display will return to the previous screen prior to this procedure.<br />
Press the Features button on the control panel, and then on the screen, check that Scan is displayed on<br />
the Menu screen.<br />
<br />
Close<br />
Change<br />
Settings<br />
Setting <strong>Scanner</strong> Environment 1<br />
137
Setting <strong>Scanner</strong> Environment 138<br />
1<br />
1.6<br />
Configuring Computer<br />
You need to do the following settings on the computer to export the scanned document to<br />
the computer.<br />
● Using mailbox<br />
● Using Job Template<br />
1.6.1 Using Mailbox<br />
In order to retrieve scanned document, install the scanner driver on the computer.<br />
For details on the operating environment of the scanner driver and the installation<br />
method, see “1.7 Installing the Network <strong>Scanner</strong> Utility” (P. 139).<br />
1.6.2 Using Job Template<br />
For CentreWare Scanning Services<br />
For details on the operating environment of the optional CentreWare Scanning<br />
Services and the installation method, refer to CentreWare Scanning Services<br />
Installation <strong>Guide</strong>.<br />
For CentreWare Internet Services<br />
The following settings are necessary to scan by using CentreWare Internet Services.<br />
● FTP server<br />
Register a user account that can be accessed from the client PC.<br />
● Client PC<br />
Set up the client PC so that it can use TCP/IP.<br />
● Creating a job template and setting the FTP destination (repository)<br />
CentreWare Internet Services help for details on how to create job templates and how to set the FTP<br />
destination (repository). You can display help by selecting Job Templates in the CentreWare Internet<br />
Services screen and then clicking on help.<br />
You can also enable the Cookie setting on the Web.
1.7<br />
Installing the Network<br />
<strong>Scanner</strong> Utility<br />
Network <strong>Scanner</strong> Utility is the software which allows you to access stored data in the mailbox<br />
from a personal computer. This section describes the installation and uninstallation of<br />
the network scanner utility using the PCL Driver/Network Utility (Windows ® ) CD-ROM.<br />
CentreWare Scanning Services Installation <strong>Guide</strong> for details on the operating environment of CentreWare Scanning<br />
Services (option) and the installation method.<br />
1.7.1 Required Environment<br />
To install the Network <strong>Scanner</strong> utility, a personal computer must meet all the following<br />
requirements:<br />
■Target Operation System<br />
The following operation systems are compatible with the utility:<br />
● Microsoft ® Windows ® 95/Windows ® 98/Windows ® Me operating system<br />
● Microsoft ® Windows NT ® operating system Version 4.0/Windows ® 2000/<br />
Windows ® XP operating system<br />
Windows NT 4.0 Server TSE (Terminal Server Edition) and Windows 2000 Server/Advanced Server<br />
Terminal Service are not compatible with this feature.<br />
■Personal Computer<br />
The target computer must meet all the following requirements:<br />
● Running i486DX4/100 MHz processor or above (Pentium 100 MHz or above is<br />
recommended)<br />
● 32 Mbyte memory or more<br />
● 40 Mbyte or more of free hard disk space (not including the space for storing<br />
scanned data)<br />
■Network<br />
A personal computer has to be connected to a network and be able to communicate<br />
with the TCP/IP protocol.<br />
See the manuals of the respective OS to confirm and add protocol setting on the computer.<br />
■Target Application Software<br />
To import the data stored in the mailbox to an application software, the software<br />
must be compatible with the TWAIN interface.<br />
Regarding the compatibility of application software with the network scanner driver, see the Network<br />
<strong>Scanner</strong> Driver Readme.txt in the PCL Driver/Network Utility CD-ROM.<br />
Setting <strong>Scanner</strong> Environment<br />
1<br />
139
Setting <strong>Scanner</strong> Environment 1<br />
140<br />
1.7 Installing the Network <strong>Scanner</strong> Utility<br />
1.7.2 Installation<br />
Procedure<br />
The Network <strong>Scanner</strong> Utility includes the following two softwares:<br />
● Network <strong>Scanner</strong> Driver<br />
Scan driver to import the data stored in the mailbox of the machine to the software compatible with<br />
TWAIN.<br />
● Mailbox Viewer<br />
Software to check, import or delete the data stored in the mailbox of the machine.<br />
You can install both software at a time following the installation procedure below:<br />
1 Click Start and then click Run.<br />
The Run dialog box will be displayed.<br />
2 Insert the PCL Driver/Network Utility CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.<br />
Type the drive name (e.g. E:) and the path name (\English\Utility\<br />
Win9x_Me\SCN\Disk1\Setup, \English\Utility\NT40\SCN\Disk1\Setup<br />
or \English\Utility\Win2000\SCN\Disk1\Setup), then click OK. The drive<br />
name may be different depending on your system (personal computer).
3 Click Next and continue with the installation.<br />
1.7 Installing the Network <strong>Scanner</strong> Utility<br />
4 When the installation is completed, the following dialog box appears.<br />
Click “Yes, I want to restart my computer now.”, then Finish.<br />
The installation is completed and the Windows restarts automatically.<br />
Setting <strong>Scanner</strong> Environment 1<br />
141
Setting <strong>Scanner</strong> Environment 1<br />
142<br />
1.7 Installing the Network <strong>Scanner</strong> Utility<br />
1.7.3 Uninstallation<br />
Procedure<br />
This section describes the procedure to remove the Network <strong>Scanner</strong> Utility<br />
installed in Microsoft Windows.<br />
When upgrading the network scanner utility, make sure you uninstall the existing network scanner<br />
utility.<br />
1 Double-click My Computer, Control Panel, then Add/Remove Programs.<br />
2 Click <strong>Fuji</strong> <strong>Xerox</strong> Network <strong>Scanner</strong> Utility, then Add/Remove.<br />
3 Click Yes.<br />
The uninstallation is completed.
2Documents for<br />
Scanning<br />
2.1 About Documents .......................................................................... 144<br />
2.1.1 Suitable Document Sizes................................................ 144<br />
2.1.2 Automatic Document Size Sensing ................................ 145<br />
2.1.3 Special Documents to Note ............................................ 145<br />
2.2 Loading Documents ....................................................................... 147<br />
2.2.1 On Document Glass ....................................................... 147<br />
2.2.2 In DADF .......................................................................... 148<br />
2.2.3 Document Orientation..................................................... 149<br />
2.2.4 Scanning in Batches....................................................... 150
Documents for Scanning 144<br />
2<br />
2.1<br />
About Documents<br />
You can load documents either on the document glass or in the Duplex Automatic Document<br />
Feeder (DADF).<br />
When installed, the DADF can be used to allow multiple sheets of documents to be loaded.<br />
This section describes the types of documents that can be placed on the document glass or<br />
loaded in the DADF.<br />
2.1.1 Suitable Document Sizes<br />
The document sizes that can be loaded on the document glass or in the DADF<br />
are as follows:<br />
Suitable<br />
document size<br />
Document Glass DADF<br />
Minimum: 15 × 15 mm<br />
Maximum: 334.5 × 452 mm<br />
Scan area 297 × 432 mm<br />
Document weight<br />
(G.S.M.* 1 )<br />
Loading capacity<br />
(sheets)<br />
Minimum: 148.5 × 210 mm<br />
(A5 )<br />
Maximum: 297 × 432 mm<br />
(A3, 11 × 17")<br />
- 1-sided document: 38 – 128 g/m2 2-sided document* 2 : 50 – 110 g/m2 1 50 (38 – 100 g/m 2 )<br />
40 (101 – 128 g/m2 )<br />
*1 G.S.M. is a measure of the substance of one sheet of paper expressed in grams per<br />
square meter.<br />
*2 The value for scanning both sides of 2-sided document.
2.1.2 Automatic Document Size Sensing<br />
2.1 About Documents<br />
This machine will automatically detect the document size when scanning. For<br />
standard sizes in the table below, you do not need to specify the document size<br />
for scanning.<br />
Automatically detected<br />
document sizes<br />
For the following, the sizes on the left will be detected as sizes on the right:<br />
On document glass:<br />
For scanning documents of non-standard sizes, specify the document size in Scan Size on the Scan<br />
Options tab. For details on entering the document size, see “3.3.6 Scan Size” (P. 171).<br />
2.1.3 Special Documents to Note<br />
This section describes the special documents to note.<br />
Document glass<br />
Document glass DADF<br />
B6, B6 , B5, B5 , B4, A6, A5,<br />
A5 , A4, A4 , A3, 8.5×11" ,<br />
8.5×13", 8.5×14"<br />
● 8×10" → B5 ● 8.5×13" → A4<br />
● 8×10" → A4 ● 8.5×14" → A4<br />
● 8×10.5" → A4 ● 11×15" → A3<br />
B5, B5 , B4, A5 , A4, A4 ,<br />
A3, 8.5×11", 8.5×11" ,<br />
8.5×14", 11×17"<br />
● 8.5×11"* → A4 ● 11×17" → A3<br />
* For 8.5×11", the detected size can be changed according to the settings by the customer engineer.<br />
In DADF:<br />
● 11×15" → A3<br />
For the following types of documents, an error message about the document size<br />
not being detected automatically might be displayed or an image loss might<br />
occur.<br />
Resolve the problem by the suggested solution.<br />
Documents for Scanning 2<br />
145
146<br />
2.1 About Documents<br />
Documents for Scanning 2●<br />
DADF<br />
Document Solution<br />
Document of non-standard<br />
size<br />
Glossy documents<br />
Thick documents<br />
(e.g. booklets)<br />
Highly transparent documents<br />
(e.g. transparencies)<br />
Torn, wrinkled, punched or<br />
curled documents<br />
Specify the document size in Scan Size on the Scan Options<br />
tab.<br />
Place a piece of white paper of the same size on top of the<br />
document. Alternatively, specify the document size in Scan<br />
Size on the Scan Options tab.<br />
Do not load very wet documents. Water might leak to the internal part of the machine causing<br />
machine breakdown.<br />
● Do not load documents heavier than 5 kg. You may break the document glass and the machine.<br />
Documents in photo albums might not be scanned correctly due to the wavy condition of the film.<br />
“3.3.6 Scan Size” (P. 171) for details on entering the document size.<br />
The following types of documents might be jammed or spoilt if loaded in the<br />
DADF. Place them on the document glass.<br />
● documents with folded lines ● torn, wrinkled, punched or curled documents<br />
● glossy documents (e.g. photos) ● clipped, stapled or glued documents<br />
● cut and pasted documents ● documents with coating or carbon on the reverse<br />
side<br />
● thick documents ● highly transparent documents (e.g. transparencies)<br />
● lightweight documents ● heat-sensitive documents
2.2<br />
Loading Documents<br />
This section describes the procedure of loading documents.<br />
2.2.1 On Document Glass<br />
Procedure<br />
The following procedure describes how to load document on the document<br />
glass.<br />
1 Open the document cover.<br />
2 Place the document facing down and<br />
align it against the upper left corner of<br />
the document glass.<br />
Place a sheet of white paper on top of highly transparent<br />
documents like transparencies or tracing paper.<br />
3 Close the document cover.<br />
● When scanning thick documents, do<br />
not use excessive force to press it<br />
against the document glass. The<br />
glass may break and injure you.<br />
● Avoid looking at the copy lamp<br />
directly when scanning with the document<br />
cover open. It may strain or<br />
hurt your eyes.<br />
Documents for Scanning<br />
2<br />
147
Documents for Scanning 2<br />
148<br />
2.2 Loading Documents<br />
2.2.2 In DADF<br />
Procedure<br />
The DADF allows you to load up to 50 sheets of documents from 148.5 × 210<br />
mm to 297 × 432 mm. The loaded documents will be scanned from the topmost<br />
sheet down and then output with the scanned side facing down. The following<br />
procedure describes how to load documents in the DADF.<br />
Up to 40 sheets of heavyweight (101 – 128 g/m 2 ) can be loaded.<br />
1 Align the edges of the documents.<br />
Remove any clips or staples attached to the documents.<br />
When loading large documents, pull out the extension tray.<br />
2 Place the documents facing up (side<br />
one facing up for 2-sided documents),<br />
aligned to the inner corner of the<br />
DADF, and in the direction of the<br />
arrow.<br />
The confirmation indicator lights up.<br />
Usually, load the documents in the Head to Left setting.<br />
The scanned documents will be retrieved as Head<br />
to Top setting on the computer.<br />
3 Shift the document guide to gently<br />
touch the edge of the document.<br />
Avoid the following actions to prevent jamming or<br />
damaging your documents:<br />
● Do not hold on to documents when they are being<br />
fed into the feeder.<br />
● Do not allow the output documents to over-stack on<br />
the document output tray.<br />
● Do not place any object on the document output tray.
Mixed size documents<br />
2.2 Loading Documents<br />
Documents of different sizes can be loaded together. To do this, align the documents<br />
against the inner corner of the DADF, and set Mixed Size Originals on the<br />
Scan Options tab to On before scanning. If this option is not selected before<br />
scanning, it will cause the document to jam.<br />
For details, see “3.3.5 Mixed Size Originals” (P. 168).<br />
2.2.3 Document Orientation<br />
When the DADF has been installed and used for scanning, you have to set Original<br />
Orientation in order to specify the “Head” position of the document.<br />
For Original Orientation of 2 Sided Originals, select either Head to Top or Head<br />
to Left.<br />
Usually, load the documents in the “Head to Left” orientation. The scanned documents<br />
will be retrieved as “Head to Top” orientation on the computer.<br />
When retrieving 2-sided documents, check if the image is set in the orientation<br />
defined in Original Orientation.<br />
● Head to Left<br />
● Head to Top<br />
“3.3.4 Original Orientation” (P. 166) for details on Original Orientation.<br />
Documents for Scanning 2<br />
149
Documents for Scanning 2<br />
150<br />
2.2 Loading Documents<br />
2.2.4 Scanning in Batches<br />
Procedure<br />
When there is another batch of documents to be scanned after the first batch has<br />
been done, select the Next Original button on the screen displayed on the touch<br />
panel display while scanning, so as to prepare the machine for the next batch of<br />
documents waiting to be scanned. Multiple documents can be scanned as one<br />
piece of data. Up to 999 pages can be stored.<br />
When the pages of the scanning documents are beyond the maximum storable amount of pages, scanning<br />
is aborted. Select whether to stop scanning or restart scanning according to the message displayed.<br />
The maximum storable amount of pages can be changed. For more details, see “5.8.6 Others (Scan<br />
Mode Settings)” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier).<br />
1 Select Next Original while scanning the document.<br />
Scan Job :Doc. No. 00048<br />
Save in : Mailbox001 - report<br />
Pages : 1<br />
A 3<br />
Full Color JPEG<br />
300dpi / 100%<br />
● When using the DADF, wait until the machine has completed scanning the first batch of documents<br />
before loading the next batch.<br />
● If no action is carried out after the above screen has been displayed for some time, the machine will<br />
reboot automatically with the assumption that there are no more documents to be scanned. You can<br />
change the default value of this auto clear time in the System Administration Mode. For details on<br />
the way to change, see “5.4.1 Machine Clock/Timers” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong><br />
(Copier). The default value is 60 (seconds).<br />
2 Load the next batch of documents.<br />
Stop<br />
Last Original<br />
Next Original<br />
Close
2.2 Loading Documents<br />
3 Press Start.<br />
When there are more batches of documents, repeat the procedure of loading the documents and press<br />
the Start button.<br />
4 Select Last Original after all the documents have been scanned.<br />
Scan Job :Doc. No. 00048<br />
Save in : Mailbox 001 - report<br />
Pages : 1<br />
A 3<br />
Full Color JPEG<br />
300dpi / 100%<br />
Stop<br />
Last Original<br />
Next Original<br />
Start<br />
Close<br />
Documents for Scanning 2<br />
151
3Scanning With Mailbox<br />
3.1 How to Scan................................................................................... 154<br />
3.2 Canceling Scanning/Checking Job Status ..................................... 156<br />
3.2.1 Canceling Scanning From This Machine ........................ 156<br />
3.2.2 Canceling Scanning From Computer.............................. 158<br />
3.2.3 Checking Job Status of Scan Instruction........................ 158<br />
3.3 Configuring Scan Settings ............................................................. 160<br />
3.3.1 Output Color ................................................................... 160<br />
3.3.2 Scan Resolution.............................................................. 162<br />
3.3.3 2 Sided Originals ............................................................ 163<br />
3.3.4 Original Orientation......................................................... 166<br />
3.3.5 Mixed Size Originals ....................................................... 168<br />
3.3.6 Scan Size........................................................................ 171<br />
3.3.7 Reduce/Enlarge.............................................................. 174<br />
3.3.8 Bound Originals .............................................................. 177<br />
3.3.9 Border Erase................................................................... 180<br />
3.3.10 Original Type................................................................... 183<br />
3.3.11 Lighter/Darker/Contrast .................................................. 185<br />
3.3.12 Auto Exposure ................................................................ 187<br />
3.3.13 Image Compression........................................................ 189<br />
3.3.14 File Format...................................................................... 191<br />
3.4 Importing Scanned Data to Computer ........................................... 194<br />
3.4.1 Importing to Application Program ................................... 194<br />
3.4.2 Importing From Mailbox Viewer ...................................... 199<br />
3.4.3 Importing Mailbox Data Using CentreWare Internet Services<br />
............................................................................... 201<br />
3.5 Checking/Deleting Scanned Data in Mailbox ................................. 203<br />
3.5.1 Checking/Deleting on This Machine ............................... 203<br />
3.5.2 Checking/Deleting on Computer (Mailbox Viewer) ......... 206<br />
3.6 Changing Network <strong>Scanner</strong> Utility Settings ................................... 208<br />
3.6.1 Changing Network <strong>Scanner</strong> Driver Settings ................... 208<br />
3.6.2 Changing Mailbox Viewer Settings ................................. 212
Scanning With Mailbox 154<br />
3<br />
3.1<br />
How to Scan<br />
Using this machine, you can scan the document, and then save the scanned data in the<br />
mailbox. The scanned data can be saved as JPEG or TIFF file format.<br />
This section describes the basic flow of scanning.<br />
To use this machine for scanning, you need to set the IP address, enable the port, and create the mailbox beforehand.<br />
For details on these settings, see “1.4 Configuring for Using Mailbox” (P. 122).<br />
Procedure<br />
1 Load the document to be scanned.<br />
“2.2 Loading Documents” (P. 147) for details on loading documents.<br />
2 Display the Basic Scanning screen.<br />
Basic Scanning<br />
Scan Options<br />
3 Under Save to, select Mailbox.<br />
The Mailbox screen is displayed.<br />
Image Quality/<br />
File Format<br />
Menu<br />
Scan to: Output Color Scan Resolution 2 Sided Originals<br />
Auto 200dpi<br />
1 Sided<br />
Mailbox... Full Color<br />
300dpi<br />
2 Sided (H to H)<br />
Grayscale<br />
400dpi<br />
2 Sided (H to T)<br />
Job Template... Black<br />
600dpi<br />
More...<br />
Basic Scanning<br />
Scan Options<br />
Image Quality/<br />
File Format<br />
Menu<br />
Scan to: Output Color Scan Resolution 2 Sided Originals<br />
Auto 200dpi<br />
1 Sided<br />
Mailbox... Full Color<br />
300dpi<br />
2 Sided (H to H)<br />
Grayscale<br />
400dpi<br />
2 Sided (H to T)<br />
Job Template... Black<br />
600dpi<br />
More...
3.1 How to Scan<br />
4 Select the mailbox for saving the scanned data.<br />
Selecting the button will display the previous screen and the button the next screen. You can<br />
use the numeric keypad on the control panel to enter the mailbox number directly at Go to.<br />
Mailbox Close<br />
001 002 003 004<br />
K Mailbox H Mailbox H Mailbox<br />
(Not in Use)<br />
005 006 007<br />
008<br />
(Not in Use) (Not in Use) (Not in Use) (Not in Use)<br />
009 010 011 012<br />
(Not in Use) (Not in Use)<br />
(Not in Use) (Not in Use)<br />
If there are documents in the mailbox, the number of documents saved in the mailbox will be displayed<br />
on the bottom right of the screen in No. of Docs: once the mailbox is selected.<br />
● If the password has been set, the screen to enter the password will appear. Enter the password and<br />
then select the Confirm button. If you have forgotten the mailbox password, reset it in the System<br />
Administration Mode.<br />
● Selecting the mailbox and the Document List button will enable you to check documents saved in<br />
the mailbox. After checking, select the Close button.<br />
5 Select Close.<br />
The display will return to the Basic Scanning screen.<br />
6 If necessary, configure the scan settings.<br />
(001 - 200)<br />
“3.3 Configuring Scan Settings” (P. 160) for details on configuring the scan settings.<br />
7 Press Start.<br />
Scanning of the document will begin and the scanned data will be saved in the specified mailbox.<br />
Go to<br />
Document List<br />
Mailbox Close<br />
001 002 003 004<br />
K Mailbox H Mailbox H Mailbox<br />
005 006 007<br />
(Not in Use)<br />
(Not in Use)<br />
009 010 011 012<br />
(Not in Use) (Not in Use)<br />
(Not in Use)<br />
(Not in Use)<br />
008<br />
(Not in Use)<br />
(Not in Use) (Not in Use)<br />
Go to<br />
(001 - 200)<br />
Document List<br />
No. of Docs: 10<br />
Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />
155
Scanning With Mailbox 156<br />
3<br />
3.2<br />
Canceling Scanning/<br />
Checking Job Status<br />
This section describes how to cancel scanning and check the status of scan jobs in process.<br />
Once scanning is canceled, the scan data already saved in the mailbox will also be deleted.<br />
3.2.1 Canceling Scanning From This Machine<br />
Procedure<br />
The procedure to cancel scanning from this machine is as follows.<br />
If the following screen does not appear, refer to the procedure on the next page,<br />
“ Canceling scan jobs in this machine” (P. 157).<br />
1 Either press Stop on the control panel or select Stop on the following<br />
screen.<br />
Scan Job :Doc. No. 00048<br />
Close<br />
Pages : 1<br />
A 3<br />
Full Color JPEG<br />
300dpi / 100%<br />
The machine will pause and display the following screen.<br />
2 To stop scanning, either press C on the control panel or select Stop on<br />
the following screen. However, the page in the midst of scanning will be<br />
scanned.<br />
Scan Job<br />
Save in : Mailbox001 - report<br />
Pages : 1<br />
A 3<br />
Full Color JPEG<br />
300dpi / 100%<br />
:Doc. No. 00048<br />
To continue scanning, either press the Start button on the control panel or select the Start button on<br />
the screen.<br />
Stop<br />
Last Original<br />
Next Original<br />
Stop<br />
Last Original<br />
Next Original<br />
Start<br />
Close
Canceling scan jobs in this machine<br />
Procedure<br />
3.2 Canceling Scanning/Checking Job Status<br />
The procedure to cancel scan jobs received by the machine is as follows:<br />
1 On the control panel, press Job Status.<br />
The Job Status screen is displayed.<br />
2 On the screen, select Current and Pending Jobs.<br />
Job Status<br />
Current and<br />
Pending Jobs<br />
A list of jobs in process or waiting will be displayed.<br />
3 Select the job that you want to delete.<br />
Job Status<br />
The job status will be displayed.<br />
Completed Jobs<br />
4 Either press Stop on the control panel or select Stop on the following<br />
screen.<br />
The machine will pause and display the following screen.<br />
Stored<br />
Documents<br />
Secure Print Sample Print Delayed Print<br />
Private Mailbox<br />
Current and<br />
Pending Jobs<br />
Completed Jobs<br />
Stored<br />
Documents<br />
Doc. No. - Job Type Status Remote Terminal/Contents Pages<br />
00010-Print Job Print Wait <strong>User</strong> Imari: Host 0/100<br />
00005-Scan Job Scanning Mailbox 001<br />
3<br />
Print<br />
Waiting Jobs<br />
Scan Job :Doc. No. 00048<br />
Close<br />
Pages : 1<br />
A 3<br />
Full Color JPEG<br />
300dpi / 100%<br />
Stop<br />
Last Original<br />
Next Original<br />
Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />
157
Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />
158<br />
3.2 Canceling Scanning/Checking Job Status<br />
5 To stop scanning, either press C on the control panel or select Stop on<br />
the following screen. However, the page in the midst of scanning will be<br />
scanned.<br />
To continue scanning, either press the Start button on the control panel or select the Start button on the<br />
screen.<br />
6 Select Close.<br />
Repeat steps 2 to 5 if you have other jobs to delete.<br />
3.2.2 Canceling Scanning From Computer<br />
You can use CentreWare Internet Services to cancel scanning from the computer.<br />
The Help file displayed by clicking the Help button on the bottom frame of CentreWare Internet Services<br />
screen for details on using CentreWare Internet Services.<br />
3.2.3 Checking Job Status of Scan Instruction<br />
The procedure to check the status of job in the process of scanning is as follows:<br />
Using this machine<br />
Procedure<br />
Scan Job<br />
Save in : Mailbox001 - report<br />
Pages : 1<br />
A 3<br />
Full Color JPEG<br />
300dpi / 100%<br />
:Doc. No. 00048<br />
1 On the control panel, press Job Status.<br />
The Job Status screen is displayed.<br />
Stop<br />
Last Original<br />
Next Original<br />
Start<br />
Close
3.2 Canceling Scanning/Checking Job Status<br />
2 On the screen, select either Current and Pending Jobs or Completed<br />
Jobs.<br />
Job Status<br />
Current and<br />
Pending Jobs<br />
A list of jobs will be displayed.<br />
3 Check the job status.<br />
Job Status<br />
Completed Jobs<br />
For example, if a job in process is selected, the following screen will be displayed.<br />
4 After checking, press Features on the control panel.<br />
Using CentreWare Internet Services<br />
Stored<br />
Documents<br />
Secure Print Sample Print Delayed Print<br />
Private Mailbox<br />
Current and<br />
Pending Jobs<br />
Completed Jobs<br />
Stored<br />
Documents<br />
Doc. No. - Job Type Status Remote Terminal/Contents Pages<br />
00010-Print Job Print Wait <strong>User</strong> Imari: Host 0/100<br />
00005-Scan Job Scanning Mailbox 001<br />
3<br />
Scan Job<br />
Save in : Mailbox001 - report<br />
Pages : 1<br />
A 3<br />
Full Color JPEG<br />
300dpi / 100%<br />
:Doc. No. 00048<br />
Print<br />
Waiting Jobs<br />
You can also use CentreWare Internet Services to check job status of scan jobs.<br />
See “Chapter 5 Configuring From Computer (CentreWare Internet Services)”<br />
(P. 105) in “Part 1 <strong>Printer</strong>” for details on CentreWare Internet Services.<br />
Stop<br />
Last Original<br />
Next Original<br />
Close<br />
Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />
159
Scanning With Mailbox 160<br />
3<br />
3.3<br />
Configuring Scan Settings<br />
This section describes the scan settings for scanning.<br />
The following scan settings are available:<br />
● Output Color<br />
● Scan Resolution<br />
● 2 Sided Originals (available only if DADF is attached)<br />
● Scan Size<br />
● Mixed Size Originals (available only if DADF is attached)<br />
● Reduce/Enlarge<br />
● Bound Originals<br />
● Border Erase<br />
● Original Type<br />
● Lighter/Darker/Contrast<br />
● Auto Exposure<br />
● Image Compression<br />
● File Format<br />
Configure the required scan settings according to the following procedures:<br />
3.3.1 Output Color<br />
You can set the output color for scanning the document.<br />
The options available for output color are as follows:<br />
● Auto<br />
Select this to detect the color of the document automatically so that color document will be scanned<br />
in full color and black/white document in black/white.<br />
● Full Color<br />
Select this when scanning color documents. It can reproduce text in office documents clearly or gradations<br />
in color faithfully.<br />
● Grayscale<br />
Select this when scanning in grayscale. It can also reproduce faithfully the shades in black and white<br />
as well as the mid tones of gradation. It is suitable for shades which cannot be expressed in black<br />
and white only.<br />
● Black<br />
Select this when scanning black and white documents. Then, select the Original Type for black and<br />
white documents as described in “3.3.10 Original Type” (P. 183)<br />
● You can change the default value of Output Color in the System Administration Mode. For details<br />
on the way to change, see “5.8 Scan Mode Settings” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong><br />
(Copier). The default is set as Black.<br />
● Scan resolution might differ according to the installed memory capacity. For details, contact our<br />
Customer Support Center.
Procedure<br />
1 Load the document to be scanned.<br />
“2.2 Loading Documents” (P. 147) for details on loading documents.<br />
2 Display the Basic Scanning screen.<br />
Basic Scanning<br />
Scan Options<br />
Image Quality/<br />
File Format<br />
3 Select the mailbox for saving the scanned data.<br />
“3.1 How to Scan” (P. 154) for details on selecting the mailbox.<br />
3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />
4 Select the output color option from Output Color on the Basic Scanning<br />
screen.<br />
5 If necessary, configure other scan settings.<br />
6 Press Start.<br />
Scanning of the document will begin and the scanned data will be saved in the specified mailbox.<br />
Menu<br />
Scan to: Output Color Scan Resolution 2 Sided Originals<br />
Auto 200dpi<br />
1 Sided<br />
Mailbox... Full Color<br />
300dpi<br />
2 Sided (H to H)<br />
Grayscale<br />
400dpi<br />
2 Sided (H to T)<br />
Job Template... Black<br />
600dpi<br />
More...<br />
Basic Scanning<br />
Scan Options<br />
Image Quality/<br />
File Format<br />
Menu<br />
Scan to: Output Color Scan Resolution 2 Sided Originals<br />
Auto 200dpi<br />
1 Sided<br />
Mailbox... Full Color<br />
300dpi<br />
2 Sided (H to H)<br />
Grayscale<br />
400dpi<br />
2 Sided (H to T)<br />
Job Template... Black<br />
600dpi<br />
More...<br />
Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />
161
Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />
162<br />
3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />
3.3.2 Scan Resolution<br />
Procedure<br />
You can set the scan resolution for scanning the document.<br />
The options available for scan resolution are as follows. The larger the value, the<br />
finer the scan but the data size will become bigger.<br />
● 200 dpi<br />
● 300 dpi<br />
● 400 dpi<br />
● 600 dpi<br />
● For data that is larger, the processing of scanning and data transferring might be slower.<br />
● You can change the default value of Scan Resolution in the System Administration Mode. For<br />
details on the way to change, see “5.8 Scan Mode Settings” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong><br />
<strong>Guide</strong> (Copier). The default is set as 200dpi.<br />
● Scan resolution might differ according to the installed memory capacity. For details, contact our<br />
Customer Support Center.<br />
1 Load the document to be scanned.<br />
“2.2 Loading Documents” (P. 147) for details on loading documents.<br />
2 Display the Basic Scanning screen.<br />
Basic Scanning<br />
Scan Options<br />
Image Quality/<br />
File Format<br />
3 Select the mailbox for saving the scanned data.<br />
“3.1 How to Scan” (P. 154) for details on selecting the mailbox.<br />
Menu<br />
Scan to: Output Color Scan Resolution 2 Sided Originals<br />
Auto 200dpi<br />
1 Sided<br />
Mailbox... Full Color<br />
300dpi<br />
2 Sided (H to H)<br />
Grayscale<br />
400dpi<br />
2 Sided (H to T)<br />
Job Template... Black<br />
600dpi<br />
More...
3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />
4 Select the scan resolution option from Scan Resolution on the Basic<br />
Scanning screen.<br />
5 If necessary, configure other scan settings.<br />
6 Press Start.<br />
Scanning of the document will begin and the scanned data will be saved in the specified mailbox.<br />
3.3.3 2 Sided Originals<br />
Procedure<br />
Basic Scanning<br />
Scan Options<br />
Image Quality/<br />
File Format<br />
When the DADF is attached, you can scan both sides of 2-sided documents<br />
automatically.<br />
When the binding location of the document is set, the top and bottom edges of both<br />
sides of the document will be arranged in the same direction and scanned.<br />
You cannot change the default value of 2 Sided Originals as it is fixed.<br />
1 Load the document to be scanned.<br />
“2.2 Loading Documents” (P. 147) for details on loading documents.<br />
2 Display the Basic Scanning screen.<br />
Menu<br />
Scan to: Output Color Scan Resolution 2 Sided Originals<br />
Auto 200dpi<br />
1 Sided<br />
Mailbox... Full Color<br />
300dpi<br />
2 Sided (H to H)<br />
Grayscale<br />
400dpi<br />
2 Sided (H to T)<br />
Job Template... Black<br />
600dpi<br />
More...<br />
Basic Scanning<br />
Scan Options<br />
Image Quality/<br />
File Format<br />
Menu<br />
Scan to: Output Color Scan Resolution 2 Sided Originals<br />
Auto 200dpi<br />
1 Sided<br />
Mailbox... Full Color<br />
300dpi<br />
2 Sided (H to H)<br />
Grayscale<br />
400dpi<br />
2 Sided (H to T)<br />
Job Template... Black<br />
600dpi<br />
More...<br />
Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />
163
Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />
164<br />
3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />
3 Select the mailbox for saving the scanned data.<br />
“3.1 How to Scan” (P. 154) for details on selecting the mailbox.<br />
4 Select 2 Sided (H to H) or 2 Sided (H to T) from 2 Sided Originals on<br />
the Basic Scanning screen.<br />
To specify the orientation and binding location of the documents, select<br />
More….<br />
■When More… has been selected:<br />
The 2 Sided Originals screen is displayed.<br />
1<br />
Select 1 Sided or 2 Sided.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
2 If 2 Sided has been selected, select the desired item under Originals.<br />
If 1 Sided has been selected, proceed to step 3 .
3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />
● Select the Head to Head button for documents with the top/bottom of the image in the same direction<br />
on both sides of the document.<br />
● Select the Head to Toe button for documents with the top/bottom of the image on one side in the<br />
opposite direction of the top/bottom of the image on the other side.<br />
3<br />
Check Original Orientation.<br />
Usually, load the documents in the Head to Left setting. The scanned<br />
documents will be retrieved as Head to Top orientation on the computer.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
If the document is not loaded in the direction specified in Original Orientation, the Head of the document<br />
will be wrongly detected by the machine. For details on Original Orientation, see “3.3.4 Original<br />
Orientation” (P. 166).<br />
● When Original Orientation is set as Head to Top:<br />
● When Original Orientation is set as Head to Left:<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />
165
Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />
166<br />
3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />
5 After checking the setting, select Save.<br />
The display will return to the Basic Scanning screen.<br />
6 If necessary, configure other scan settings.<br />
7 Press Start.<br />
Scanning of the document will begin and the scanned data will be saved in the specified mailbox.<br />
3.3.4 Original Orientation<br />
When the DADF is installed and used for scanning, you have to set Original Orientation<br />
in order to specify the Head position of the document.<br />
The options for Original Orientation are as follows:<br />
Usually, load the documents in the “Head to Left” orientation. The scanned documents<br />
will be retrieved as “Head to Top” orientation on the computer.<br />
● Head to Left<br />
Select this when you place the “Head” of the document at the left edge of the document glass or<br />
DADF. Always select this for documents placed with the Head at the left edge (with texts of the horizontal<br />
type).<br />
● Head to Top<br />
Select this when you place the “Head” of the document at the top edge of the document glass or<br />
DADF.<br />
● The orientation of the original document is not effected by the orientation of the scanned data.<br />
● You can change the default value of Original Orientation in the System Administration Mode. For<br />
details on the way to change, see “5.8 Scan Mode Settings” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong><br />
<strong>Guide</strong> (Copier). The default is set as Head to Left.
Procedure<br />
1 Load the document to be scanned.<br />
“2.2 Loading Documents” (P. 147) for details on loading documents.<br />
2 Display the Basic Scanning screen.<br />
Basic Scanning<br />
Scan Options<br />
Image Quality/<br />
File Format<br />
3 Select the mailbox for saving the scanned data.<br />
“3.1 How to Scan” (P. 154) for details on selecting the mailbox.<br />
3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />
4 Select More… from 2 Sided Originals on the Basic Scanning screen.<br />
The 2 Sided Originals screen is displayed.<br />
5 Based on the orientation of the document loaded, select either Head to<br />
Top or Head to Left from Original Orientation.<br />
Menu<br />
Scan to: Output Color Scan Resolution 2 Sided Originals<br />
Auto 200dpi<br />
1 Sided<br />
Mailbox... Full Color<br />
300dpi<br />
2 Sided (H to H)<br />
Grayscale<br />
400dpi<br />
2 Sided (H to T)<br />
Job Template... Black<br />
600dpi<br />
More...<br />
Basic Scanning<br />
Scan Options<br />
Image Quality/<br />
File Format<br />
Menu<br />
Scan to: Output Color Scan Resolution 2 Sided Originals<br />
Auto 200dpi<br />
1 Sided<br />
Mailbox... Full Color<br />
300dpi<br />
2 Sided (H to H)<br />
Grayscale<br />
400dpi<br />
2 Sided (H to T)<br />
Job Template... Black<br />
600dpi<br />
More...<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />
167
Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />
168<br />
3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />
Usually, load the documents in the Head to Left orientation as shown in the following diagram.<br />
6 After checking the setting, select Save.<br />
The display will return to the Basic Scanning screen.<br />
7 If necessary, configure other scan settings.<br />
8 Press Start.<br />
Scanning of the document will begin and the scanned data will be saved in the specified mailbox.<br />
3.3.5 Mixed Size Originals<br />
When the DADF is installed and used for scanning, documents of different sizes<br />
can be scanned.<br />
The options available for Mixed Size Originals are as follows.<br />
● On<br />
Select this to automatically detect the different sizes when scanning documents of mixed sizes. For<br />
details on the sizes that can be detected automatically, see “2.1.2 Automatic Document Size Sensing”<br />
(P. 145).<br />
● Off<br />
Select this when scanning documents of the same size.<br />
When using the Mixed Size Originals feature, be sure to load A5-sized document in the portrait orientation<br />
( ). Loading it in the landscape orientation may cause the document to jam or machine breakdown.<br />
● You can change the default value of Mixed Size Originals in the System Administration Mode. For<br />
details on the way to change, see “5.8 Scan Mode Settings” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong><br />
<strong>Guide</strong> (Copier). The default value is set as Off.<br />
● When you use this Mixed Size Originals feature, be sure to set Scan Size of the Scan Options screen<br />
to Auto Size Detect.<br />
● If Reduce/Enlarge on the Scan Options screen is set as Auto % and size is specified in Output Size,<br />
the documents will be automatically enlarged/reduced according to the specified size for scanning.<br />
● If the size cannot be automatically detected, an error message will prompt you to enter the document<br />
size.
Procedure<br />
1 Load documents in the Head to Left<br />
orientation with the edges A and B of<br />
the documents aligned at the top left<br />
corners.<br />
Remove any clips or staples attached to the documents.<br />
The documents might not be scanned correctly if<br />
their top left corners are not properly aligned.<br />
● Edge A of the document refers to the width of the edge<br />
that is being fed into the machine.<br />
2 Load all documents aligned to the<br />
inner edge of the DADF and the document<br />
guide.<br />
Align edge A of documents to the mouth of the<br />
feeder and adjust the document guide accordingly.<br />
“2.2.2 In DADF” (P. 148) for details on loading documents<br />
to the DADF.<br />
Be sure to align edge B of documents to the inner edge of<br />
the DADF. If the documents are not loaded correctly, it<br />
may cause the document to jam.<br />
3 Display the Basic Scanning screen.<br />
Basic Scanning<br />
Scan Options<br />
Image Quality/<br />
File Format<br />
4 Select the mailbox for saving the scanned data.<br />
“3.1 How to Scan” (P. 154) for details on selecting the mailbox.<br />
3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />
Menu<br />
Scan to: Output Color Scan Resolution 2 Sided Originals<br />
Auto 200dpi<br />
1 Sided<br />
Mailbox... Full Color<br />
300dpi<br />
2 Sided (H to H)<br />
Grayscale<br />
400dpi<br />
2 Sided (H to T)<br />
Job Template... Black<br />
600dpi<br />
More...<br />
Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />
169
Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />
170<br />
3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />
5 Check Scan Size on the Scan Options screen.<br />
■When Auto Size Detect is displayed:<br />
Proceed to step 6.<br />
Basic Scanning<br />
■When options other than Auto Size Detect are displayed:<br />
See “3.3.6 Scan Size” (P. 171) for details on setting Auto Size Detect.<br />
6 Select Mixed Size Originals on the Scan Options screen.<br />
Basic Scanning<br />
The Mixed Size Originals screen is displayed.<br />
7 Select On.<br />
Scan Options<br />
2 Sided Originals<br />
1 Sided<br />
Reduce/Enlarge<br />
100%<br />
Scan Options<br />
2 Sided Originals<br />
1 Sided<br />
Reduce/Enlarge<br />
100%<br />
Mixed Size Originals<br />
Off<br />
On<br />
Image Quality/<br />
File Format<br />
Scan Size<br />
Auto Size Detect<br />
Bound Originals<br />
Off<br />
Image Quality/<br />
File Format<br />
Scan Size<br />
Auto Size Detect<br />
Bound Originals<br />
Off<br />
Select On for this feature when<br />
copying originals of different<br />
sizes using the Document Feeder.<br />
8 After checking the setting, select Save.<br />
The display will return to the Basic Scanning screen.<br />
Cancel<br />
Menu<br />
Mixed Size Originals<br />
Off<br />
Border Erase<br />
: 2mm : 2mm<br />
: 0mm<br />
Menu<br />
Mixed Size Originals<br />
Off<br />
Border Erase<br />
: 2mm : 2mm<br />
: 0mm<br />
Save
3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />
9 If necessary, configure other scan settings.<br />
10 Press Start.<br />
Scanning of the document will begin and the scanned data will be saved in the specified mailbox.<br />
3.3.6 Scan Size<br />
Procedure<br />
You can configure the scan size for scanning.<br />
Set the scan size when scanning documents of non-standard sizes or to a different<br />
size.<br />
If the scan size is set, scanning will be done according to the specified size<br />
regardless of the actual size of the document loaded.<br />
Options for setting scan size are as follows:<br />
● Auto Size Detect<br />
Detects the document size automatically.<br />
● Standard Sizes<br />
Choose from the 11 set sizes: A3 , A4 , A4 , A5 , B4 , B5 , 11×17" , 8.5×11" ,<br />
8.5×11" , Photo 2L Size , Photo L Size .<br />
● Custom<br />
Specifies the size in the range of the document glass, 15 – 432 mm for X (horizontal direction) and<br />
15 – 297 mm for Y (vertical direction) in units of 1 mm. When setting custom size, use the ruler<br />
markings surrounding the document glass as a guide.<br />
● Among the buttons of Scan Size, the default values of all sizes except Auto Size Detect can be<br />
changed in the System Administration Mode. For details on the way to change, see “5.8 Scan Mode<br />
Settings” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier). The default values are set as A3 ,<br />
A4 , A4 , A5 , B4 , B5 , 11×17" , 8.5×11" , 8.5×11" , Photo 2L Size , Photo L<br />
Size .<br />
● If the size cannot be automatically detected, an error message will prompt you to enter the document<br />
size.<br />
1 Load the document to be scanned.<br />
“2.2 Loading Documents” (P. 147) for details on loading documents.<br />
Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />
171
Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />
172<br />
3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />
2 Display the Basic Scanning screen.<br />
Basic Scanning<br />
Scan Options<br />
3 Select the mailbox for saving the scanned data.<br />
“3.1 How to Scan” (P. 154) for details on selecting the mailbox.<br />
4 Select Scan Size on the Scan Options screen.<br />
The Scan Size screen is displayed.<br />
Image Quality/<br />
File Format<br />
5 Set the scan size.<br />
■When specifying Standard Sizes:<br />
1 Select from the scan sizes displayed.<br />
Menu<br />
Scan to: Output Color Scan Resolution 2 Sided Originals<br />
Auto 200dpi<br />
1 Sided<br />
Mailbox... Full Color<br />
300dpi<br />
2 Sided (H to H)<br />
Grayscale<br />
400dpi<br />
2 Sided (H to T)<br />
Job Template... Black<br />
600dpi<br />
More...<br />
Basic Scanning<br />
Scan Size<br />
Scan Options<br />
2 Sided Originals<br />
1 Sided<br />
Reduce/Enlarge<br />
100%<br />
Auto Size<br />
Detect<br />
A3<br />
A4<br />
A4<br />
A5<br />
B4<br />
B5<br />
11x17"<br />
Image Quality/<br />
File Format<br />
Scan Size<br />
Auto Size Detect<br />
Bound Originals<br />
Off<br />
8.5x11"<br />
8.5x11"<br />
Photo 2L 5x7"<br />
Photo L 3.5x5"<br />
Cancel<br />
Menu<br />
Mixed Size Originals<br />
Off<br />
Border Erase<br />
: 2mm : 2mm<br />
: 0mm<br />
Save<br />
(15 - 297)<br />
Y<br />
Auto<br />
mm<br />
X<br />
(15 - 432)<br />
Auto mm
■When specifying Custom:<br />
2 Using , set the values of X and Y.<br />
Scan Size<br />
Auto Size<br />
Detect<br />
A3<br />
A4<br />
A4<br />
A5<br />
B4<br />
B5<br />
11x17"<br />
8.5x11"<br />
8.5x11"<br />
Photo 2L 5x7"<br />
Photo L 3.5x5"<br />
Cancel<br />
3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />
6 After checking the setting, select Save.<br />
The Scan Options screen is displayed.<br />
7 If necessary, configure other scan settings.<br />
8 Press Start.<br />
Scanning of the document will begin and the scanned data will be saved in the specified mailbox.<br />
Save<br />
(15 - 297)<br />
Y<br />
Auto<br />
mm<br />
X<br />
(15 - 432)<br />
Auto mm<br />
Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />
173
Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />
174<br />
3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />
3.3.7 Reduce/Enlarge<br />
Procedure<br />
You can configure the scan % for scanning.<br />
Options for setting the scan % are as follows:<br />
● Preset %<br />
Choose from eight preset %: 100%, 50%, 70%, 81%, 86%, 115%, 122%, 141%.<br />
● Variable %<br />
Enter your own % for scanning. Enter between 25 to 400%, and in 1% units.<br />
● Auto %<br />
The % for scanning is automatically set based on the document size and the size set for Output Size.<br />
● Among the % for Preset %, the default values of all % except 100% can be changed in the System<br />
Administration Mode. For details on the way to change, see “5.8 Scan Mode Settings” in “Part 1<br />
Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier). The default values are set as 50%, 70%, 81%, 86%, 115%,<br />
122%, 141%.<br />
● The default values of Output Size when Auto % has been selected for scanning can be changed in<br />
the System Administration Mode. For details on the way to change, see “5.8 Scan Mode Settings”<br />
in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier). The default values are set as A3 , A4 , A4 ,<br />
A5 , B4 , B5 , 11×17" , 8.5×11" .<br />
● Areas that turn blank after scanning with Auto % will become white.<br />
1 Load the document to be scanned.<br />
“2.2 Loading Documents” (P. 147) for details on loading documents.<br />
2 Display the Basic Scanning screen.<br />
Basic Scanning<br />
Scan Options<br />
Image Quality/<br />
File Format<br />
3 Select the mailbox for saving the scanned data.<br />
“3.1 How to Scan” (P. 154) for details on selecting the mailbox.<br />
Menu<br />
Scan to: Output Color Scan Resolution 2 Sided Originals<br />
Auto 200dpi<br />
1 Sided<br />
Mailbox... Full Color<br />
300dpi<br />
2 Sided (H to H)<br />
Grayscale<br />
400dpi<br />
2 Sided (H to T)<br />
Job Template... Black<br />
600dpi<br />
More...
4 Select Reduce/Enlarge on the Scan Options screen.<br />
Basic Scanning<br />
Scan Options<br />
2 Sided Originals<br />
1 Sided<br />
Reduce/Enlarge<br />
100%<br />
Image Quality/<br />
File Format<br />
The Reduce/Enlarge screen is displayed.<br />
Scan Size<br />
Auto Size Detect<br />
Bound Originals<br />
Off<br />
5 Set the scan %.<br />
■When selecting Preset %:<br />
1 Select Preset % and then the % for scanning.<br />
■When selecting Variable %:<br />
1<br />
Reduce/Enlarge<br />
Cancel<br />
Preset %<br />
(25 - 400)<br />
100 %<br />
100% 70%<br />
A3 A4<br />
B4 B5<br />
Variable %<br />
81%<br />
B4 A4<br />
B5 A5<br />
Auto %<br />
50%<br />
A3 A5<br />
86%<br />
A3 B4<br />
A4 B5<br />
3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />
Menu<br />
Mixed Size Originals<br />
Off<br />
Border Erase<br />
: 2mm : 2mm<br />
: 0mm<br />
Select Variable % and then specify the % for scanning by using either<br />
or the numeric keypad on the screen.<br />
Reduce/Enlarge<br />
Preset %<br />
Variable %<br />
Auto %<br />
(25 - 400)<br />
100<br />
%<br />
1<br />
4<br />
7<br />
Cancel<br />
2<br />
5<br />
8<br />
115%<br />
122%<br />
141%<br />
3<br />
6<br />
9<br />
0 C<br />
Save<br />
B4 A3<br />
B5 A4<br />
A4 B4<br />
A5 B5<br />
A4 A3<br />
B5 B4<br />
Save<br />
Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />
175
Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />
176<br />
3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />
■When selecting Auto %:<br />
1 Select Auto % and then the % for scanning from Output Size.<br />
Reduce/Enlarge<br />
Preset %<br />
Variable %<br />
Auto %<br />
Output Size<br />
6 After checking the setting, select Save.<br />
The Scan Options screen is displayed.<br />
A3<br />
A4<br />
A4<br />
7 If necessary, configure other scan settings.<br />
8 Press Start.<br />
Scanning of the document will begin and the scanned data will be saved in the specified mailbox.<br />
A5<br />
B4<br />
B5<br />
Cancel<br />
11x17"<br />
Save<br />
8.5x11"
3.3.8 Bound Originals<br />
Procedure<br />
3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />
You can scan facing pages of a bound document on separate sheets of paper in<br />
page order. Useful for separating the left and right pages of bound documents for<br />
scanning.<br />
● Left Page then Right<br />
Scans from the left page of documents whose page numbers start from the left.<br />
● Right Page then Left<br />
Scans from the right page of documents whose page numbers start from the right.<br />
● Top Page then Bottom<br />
Scans from the top page of documents whose page numbers start from the top.<br />
● To scan Bound Originals, place the document on the document glass.<br />
● Bound documents of non-standard size will not be correctly separated into two parts for scanning.<br />
1 Select Bound Originals on the Scan Options screen.<br />
Basic Scanning<br />
Scan Options<br />
2 Sided Originals<br />
1 Sided<br />
Reduce/Enlarge<br />
100%<br />
Image Quality/<br />
File Format<br />
The Bound Originals screen is displayed.<br />
Scan Size<br />
Auto Size Detect<br />
Bound Originals<br />
Off<br />
Menu<br />
Mixed Size Originals<br />
Off<br />
Border Erase<br />
: 2mm : 2mm<br />
: 0mm<br />
Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />
177
Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />
178<br />
3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />
2 Select the correct document type.<br />
Bound Originals<br />
Off<br />
Left Page<br />
then Right<br />
Right Page<br />
then Left<br />
Top Page<br />
then Bottom<br />
Cancel<br />
3 Select the page order to scan.<br />
Here, we will scan documents of the “Left Page then Right” type as an example.<br />
Bound Originals<br />
Off<br />
Left Page<br />
then Right<br />
Right Page<br />
then Left<br />
Top Page<br />
then Bottom<br />
Both Pages<br />
Left Page<br />
Only<br />
Right Page<br />
Only<br />
Center Erase<br />
(0 - 50)<br />
0 mm<br />
Cancel<br />
Selecting Left Page Only or Right Page Only will scan only the left or right pages of the document in<br />
page order.<br />
4 When Center Erase is selected, set the width to be erased using .<br />
Bound Originals<br />
Off<br />
Left Page<br />
then Right<br />
Right Page<br />
then Left<br />
Top Page<br />
then Bottom<br />
Both Pages<br />
Left Page<br />
Only<br />
Right Page<br />
Only<br />
Center Erase<br />
(0 - 50)<br />
0 mm<br />
Cancel<br />
Save<br />
Save<br />
Load your originals<br />
as shown below.<br />
Save<br />
Load your originals<br />
as shown below.
3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />
5 Check the document type and then place the facing pages of the document<br />
on the document glass.<br />
Bound Originals cannot be used in the DADF.<br />
6 After checking the setting, select Save.<br />
The Scan Options screen is displayed.<br />
7 Select other scan settings if necessary.<br />
To cancel setting, press the C button on the control panel.<br />
8 Press Start.<br />
Scanning of the document will begin and the scanned data will be saved in the specified mailbox.<br />
Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />
179
Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />
180<br />
3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />
3.3.9 Border Erase<br />
When scanning bound documents or documents with the document cover open,<br />
black marks may appear around the edges or at the center binding area of the<br />
scanned result. For such cases, you can erase these marks.<br />
Options available for erasing these marks are as follows:<br />
● Top & Bottom Edges<br />
Select this to erase marks at the top and bottom edges of the document. Erases the marks at the top/<br />
bottom edges based on the orientation of the document loaded.<br />
The width of the edges to be erased can be set within 0 to 50 mm and in units of 1 mm. Default value<br />
is 2 mm.<br />
● Left & Right Edges<br />
Select this to erase marks at the left and right edges of the document. Erases the marks at the left/<br />
right edges based on the orientation of the document loaded.<br />
The width of the edges to be erased can be set within 0 to 50 mm and in units of 1 mm. Default value<br />
is 2 mm.<br />
● Center Erase<br />
Select this to erase marks at the center of bound documents. The width of the edges to be erased can<br />
be set within 0 to 50 mm and in units of 1 mm. Default value is 0 mm.<br />
● As the Top & Bottom Edges and Left & Right Edges in the Normal setting have been set as 2 mm,<br />
you need to go to the Variable Erase setting to change these values to 0 mm if no border erase is<br />
required.<br />
● For 2-sided documents, you can set the same border erase value for both sides of the document.<br />
● When Reduce/Enlarge has been set, the border erase value will be decreased/increased proportionately<br />
to the scan %.<br />
● The settings for Top & Bottom Edges and Left & Right Edges can be changed in the System Administration<br />
Mode. For details on the way to change, see “5.8 Scan Mode Settings” in “Part 1 Hardware”<br />
of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier).
1 Load the document to be scanned.<br />
“2.2 Loading Documents” (P. 147) for details on loading documents.<br />
2 Select Border Erase on the Scan Options screen.<br />
Basic Scanning<br />
Scan Options<br />
The Border Erase screen is displayed.<br />
3 Select Variable Erase.<br />
Border Erase<br />
2 Sided Originals<br />
1 Sided<br />
Reduce/Enlarge<br />
100%<br />
Normal<br />
Image Quality/<br />
File Format<br />
Scan Size<br />
Auto Size Detect<br />
Bound Originals<br />
Off<br />
3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />
4 Using , specify a value for each of Top & Bottom Edges, Left &<br />
Right Edges and Center Erase.<br />
Border Erase<br />
Variable Erase<br />
Normal<br />
Variable Erase<br />
2 mm 2 mm 0 mm<br />
(0 - 50) (0 - 50) (0 - 50)<br />
2 mm 2 mm 0 mm<br />
Cancel<br />
Cancel<br />
Menu<br />
Mixed Size Originals<br />
Off<br />
Border Erase<br />
: 2mm : 2mm<br />
: 0mm<br />
The width of the edges to be erased can be set within 0 to 50 mm and in units of 1 mm.<br />
Save<br />
Original Orientation<br />
Head to Top<br />
Head to Left<br />
Save<br />
Original Orientation<br />
Head to Top<br />
Head to Left<br />
Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />
181
Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />
182<br />
3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />
5 Check Original Orientation.<br />
Edge Erase<br />
Normal<br />
Variable<br />
Erase<br />
(0 - 50) (0 - 50) (0 - 50)<br />
5 mm 5 mm 0 mm<br />
If the document is loaded in a different orientation from the setting in Original Orientation, the scan<br />
result will not be the target result.<br />
For details on Original Orientation, see “3.3.4 Original Orientation” (P. 166).<br />
6 Select Save.<br />
The display will return to the Scan Options screen.<br />
7 Select other scan settings if necessary.<br />
To cancel setting, press the C button on the control panel.<br />
Cancel<br />
8 Press Start.<br />
Scanning of the document will begin and the scanned data will be saved in the specified mailbox.<br />
Save<br />
Original Orientation<br />
Head to Top<br />
Head to Left
3.3.10 Original Type<br />
Procedure<br />
3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />
When Black has been selected for Output Color, you can select the Original<br />
Type for black and white documents.<br />
● Text & Photo<br />
Select this when scanning documents with both text and photo. You can automatically detect text<br />
and photo, and then set the respective image mode for text and photo.<br />
● Text<br />
Select this when you want to scan text clearly. You can also scan photo, graph and drawing clearly.<br />
● Photo<br />
Select this when scanning photo.<br />
You can change the default value of Original Type in the System Administration Mode. For details on<br />
the way to change, see “5.8 Scan Mode Settings” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier).<br />
The default is set as Text.<br />
1 Load the document to be scanned.<br />
“2.2 Loading Documents” (P. 147) for details on loading documents.<br />
2 Display the Basic Scanning screen.<br />
Basic Scanning<br />
Scan Options<br />
Image Quality/<br />
File Format<br />
3 Select the mailbox for saving the scanned data.<br />
“3.1 How to Scan” (P. 154) for details on selecting the mailbox.<br />
Menu<br />
Scan to: Output Color Scan Resolution 2 Sided Originals<br />
Auto 200dpi<br />
1 Sided<br />
Mailbox... Full Color<br />
300dpi<br />
2 Sided (H to H)<br />
Grayscale<br />
400dpi<br />
2 Sided (H to T)<br />
Job Template... Black<br />
600dpi<br />
More...<br />
Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />
183
Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />
184<br />
3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />
4 Select Original Type on the Image Quality/File Format screen.<br />
Basic Scanning<br />
Scan Options<br />
The Original Type screen is displayed.<br />
5 Select the Original Type option.<br />
Original Type<br />
Original Type<br />
Text<br />
Image Compression<br />
Normal<br />
Text & Photo<br />
Text<br />
Photo<br />
Image Quality/<br />
File Format<br />
Lighter/Darker/<br />
Contrast<br />
L/D: Normal<br />
File Format<br />
TIFF<br />
This feature only works when the<br />
image is scanned using the Black<br />
option in Output Color.<br />
Cancel<br />
6 After checking the setting, select Save.<br />
The display will return to the Image Quality/File Format screen.<br />
7 If necessary, configure other scan settings.<br />
8 Press Start.<br />
Scanning of the document will begin and the scanned data will be saved in the specified mailbox.<br />
Menu<br />
Auto Exposure<br />
Off<br />
Save
3.3.11 Lighter/Darker/Contrast<br />
Procedure<br />
3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />
You can configure the density to scan documents. Even when Output Color has<br />
been set to Full Color or Grayscale, you can still set the contrast.<br />
● Lighter/Darker<br />
Select from seven levels of density from Lighter to Darker. The closer to Darker, the darker is the<br />
density of scan, and the closer to Lighter, the lighter is the scan.<br />
● Contrast<br />
Select from five levels of density from Higher to Lower. The closer to Higher, the greater the difference<br />
between the bright and dark areas with the bright areas becoming brighter, and dark areas<br />
darker. The closer to Lower, the smaller the difference between the bright and dark areas.<br />
● You can change the default value of Lighter/Darker in the System Administration Mode. For details<br />
on the way to change, see “5.8 Scan Mode Settings” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong><br />
(Copier). The default value is set as Normal.<br />
● You can change the default value of Contrast in the System Administration Mode. For details on the<br />
way to change, see “5.8 Scan Mode Settings” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier).<br />
The default value is set as Normal.<br />
1 Load the document to be scanned.<br />
“2.2 Loading Documents” (P. 147) for details on loading documents.<br />
2 Display the Basic Scanning screen.<br />
Basic Scanning<br />
Scan Options<br />
Image Quality/<br />
File Format<br />
3 Select the mailbox for saving the scanned data.<br />
“3.1 How to Scan” (P. 154) for details on selecting the mailbox.<br />
Menu<br />
Scan to: Output Color Scan Resolution 2 Sided Originals<br />
Auto 200dpi<br />
1 Sided<br />
Mailbox... Full Color<br />
300dpi<br />
2 Sided (H to H)<br />
Grayscale<br />
400dpi<br />
2 Sided (H to T)<br />
Job Template... Black<br />
600dpi<br />
More...<br />
Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />
185
Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />
186<br />
3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />
4 Select Lighter/Darker/Contrast on the Image Quality/File Format<br />
screen.<br />
Basic Scanning<br />
Original Type<br />
Text<br />
Scan Options<br />
Image Compression<br />
Normal<br />
Image Quality/<br />
File Format<br />
Lighter/Darker/<br />
Contrast<br />
L/D: Normal<br />
The Lighter/Darker/Contrast screen is displayed.<br />
5 Configure the Lighter/Darker and Contrast settings.<br />
When Black has been selected for Output Color, the Contrast setting will not be displayed.<br />
■When setting Lighter/Darker:<br />
1 Use in Lighter/Darker to specify the density.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
File Format<br />
TIFF<br />
■When selecting Contrast:<br />
<br />
1 Use in Contrast to specify the contrast.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
6 After checking the setting, select Save.<br />
The display will return to the Image Quality/File Format screen.<br />
7 If necessary, configure other scan settings.<br />
Menu<br />
Auto Exposure<br />
Off
3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />
8 Press Start.<br />
Scanning of the document will begin and the scanned data will be saved in the specified mailbox.<br />
3.3.12 Auto Exposure<br />
Procedure<br />
You can remove colors from the reverse side of the document when scanning<br />
the front side.<br />
You can change the default value of Auto Exposure in the System Administration Mode. For details on<br />
the way to change, see “5.8 Scan Mode Settings” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier).<br />
The default value is set as Off.<br />
1 Load the document to be scanned.<br />
“2.2 Loading Documents” (P. 147) for details on loading documents.<br />
2 Display the Basic Scanning screen.<br />
Basic Scanning<br />
Scan Options<br />
Image Quality/<br />
File Format<br />
3 Select the mailbox for saving the scanned data.<br />
“3.1 How to Scan” (P. 154) for details on selecting the mailbox.<br />
Menu<br />
Scan to: Output Color Scan Resolution 2 Sided Originals<br />
Auto 200dpi<br />
1 Sided<br />
Mailbox... Full Color<br />
300dpi<br />
2 Sided (H to H)<br />
Grayscale<br />
400dpi<br />
2 Sided (H to T)<br />
Job Template... Black<br />
600dpi<br />
More...<br />
Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />
187
Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />
188<br />
3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />
4 Select Auto Exposure on the Image Quality/File Format screen.<br />
Basic Scanning<br />
The Auto Exposure screen is displayed.<br />
5 Select On.<br />
Auto Exposure<br />
Original Type<br />
Text<br />
Scan Options<br />
Image Compression<br />
Normal<br />
Off<br />
On<br />
Image Quality/<br />
File Format<br />
Lighter/Darker/<br />
Contrast<br />
L/D: Normal<br />
File Format<br />
TIFF<br />
Cancel<br />
6 After checking the setting, select Save.<br />
The display will return to the Image Quality/File Format screen.<br />
7 If necessary, configure other scan settings.<br />
8 Press Start.<br />
Scanning of the document will begin and the scanned data will be saved in the specified mailbox.<br />
Menu<br />
Auto Exposure<br />
Off<br />
Save
3.3.13 Image Compression<br />
Procedure<br />
3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />
When Full Color or Grayscale has been selected for Output Color, you can select<br />
how to compress full color documents.<br />
● High<br />
Saves the file at a high compression rate. The file size becomes smaller but with a loss in image<br />
quality.<br />
● Normal<br />
Saves the file at the normal compression rate. Produces the normal file size and image quality.<br />
● Low<br />
Saves the file at a low compression rate. The image quality is better but the file size becomes bigger.<br />
The default is set as Normal.<br />
1 Load the document to be scanned.<br />
“2.2 Loading Documents” (P. 147) for details on loading documents.<br />
2 Display the Basic Scanning screen.<br />
Basic Scanning<br />
Scan Options<br />
Image Quality/<br />
File Format<br />
3 Select the mailbox for saving the scanned data.<br />
“3.1 How to Scan” (P. 154) for details on selecting the mailbox.<br />
Menu<br />
Scan to: Output Color Scan Resolution 2 Sided Originals<br />
Auto 200dpi<br />
1 Sided<br />
Mailbox... Full Color<br />
300dpi<br />
2 Sided (H to H)<br />
Grayscale<br />
400dpi<br />
2 Sided (H to T)<br />
Job Template... Black<br />
600dpi<br />
More...<br />
Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />
189
Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />
190<br />
3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />
4 Select Image Compression on the Image Quality/File Format screen.<br />
Basic Scanning<br />
Original Type<br />
Text<br />
Scan Options<br />
Image Compression<br />
Normal<br />
Image Quality/<br />
File Format<br />
Lighter/Darker/<br />
Contrast<br />
L/D: Normal<br />
The Image Compression screen is displayed.<br />
5 Select the compression method.<br />
Image Compression<br />
High<br />
Normal<br />
Low<br />
File Format<br />
TIFF<br />
This feature does not work<br />
when the image is scanned<br />
using the Black option in<br />
Output Color.<br />
Cancel<br />
6 After checking the setting, select Save.<br />
The display will return to the Image Quality/File Format screen.<br />
7 If necessary, configure other scan settings.<br />
8 Press Start.<br />
Scanning of the document will begin and the scanned data will be saved in the specified mailbox.<br />
Menu<br />
Auto Exposure<br />
Off<br />
Save
3.3.14 File Format<br />
You can set the file format for saving scanned data.<br />
The options available are as follows:<br />
Selected settings on<br />
Output Color<br />
The color of the original<br />
document is in parenthesis.<br />
TIFF/<br />
JPEG<br />
Auto<br />
Select<br />
File Format<br />
JPEG TIFF<br />
Auto (color) JPEG × ×<br />
Auto (black and white) TIFF × ×<br />
Full Color JPEG<br />
Grayscale JPEG<br />
Black TIFF ×<br />
3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />
DocuWor<br />
ks (XDW)<br />
When selecting Auto on the Output Color setting, and TIFF/JPEG Auto Select on the File Format setting<br />
while using the optional E-mail Scanning, JPEG is set to full color and grayscale documents and<br />
TIFF is set to black and white documents automatically per page.<br />
PDF<br />
: Can be set<br />
× : Cannot be set<br />
Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />
191
Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />
192<br />
3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />
Procedure<br />
1 Load the document to be scanned.<br />
“2.2 Loading Documents” (P. 147) for details on loading documents.<br />
2 Display the Basic Scanning screen.<br />
Basic Scanning<br />
Scan Options<br />
3 Select the mailbox for saving the scanned data.<br />
“3.1 How to Scan” (P. 154) for details on selecting the mailbox.<br />
4 Select File Format on the Image Quality/File Format screen.<br />
The File Format screen is displayed.<br />
Image Quality/<br />
File Format<br />
5 Select the compression method.<br />
Menu<br />
Scan to: Output Color Scan Resolution 2 Sided Originals<br />
Auto 200dpi<br />
1 Sided<br />
Mailbox... Full Color<br />
300dpi<br />
2 Sided (H to H)<br />
Grayscale<br />
400dpi<br />
2 Sided (H to T)<br />
Job Template... Black<br />
600dpi<br />
More...<br />
Basic Scanning<br />
Original Type<br />
Text<br />
Scan Options<br />
Image Compression<br />
Normal<br />
Image Quality/<br />
File Format<br />
Lighter/Darker/<br />
Contrast<br />
L/D: Normal<br />
File Format<br />
TIFF<br />
Menu<br />
Auto Exposure<br />
Off<br />
File Format Cancel Save<br />
TIFF/JPEG<br />
Auto Select<br />
TIFF<br />
JPEG<br />
DocuWorks<br />
PDF<br />
This feature is available for Job<br />
Template and it cannot be programmed<br />
on this screen. It does not work<br />
when Mailbox is selected.<br />
TIFF/JPEG Auto Select automatically<br />
selects JPEG for Full Color and<br />
Grayscale images and TIFF for<br />
black/white images.
3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />
6 After checking the setting, select Save.<br />
The display will return to the Image Quality/File Format screen.<br />
7 If necessary, configure other scan settings.<br />
8 Press Start.<br />
Scanning of the document will begin and the scanned data will be saved in the specified mailbox.<br />
Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />
193
Scanning With Mailbox 194<br />
3<br />
3.4<br />
Importing Scanned Data to<br />
Computer<br />
There are two ways to import data stored in the mailbox of this machine to the computer:<br />
● import data saved in mailbox to an application program<br />
● import data saved in mailbox from mailbox viewer<br />
This section describes the two different procedures.<br />
3.4.1 Importing to Application Program<br />
Procedure<br />
The following procedure describes how to import data saved in the mailbox of<br />
this machine to an application program.<br />
To import mailbox data, you need to use the network scanner driver.<br />
The network scanner driver is software used to import document (scanned data)<br />
saved in this mailbox of this machine to an application program on the client via<br />
the network.<br />
Here, we use Wordpad of Windows 98 as an example.<br />
“1.6 Configuring Computer” (P. 138) for details on installing the network scanner driver.<br />
1 Start the application program for importing documents.<br />
The application program must support TWAIN. TWAIN is the standard for input equipment such as<br />
scanners.<br />
The Network Print Environment <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Network.pdf) in the PCL Driver/Network Utility<br />
(Windows ® ) CD-ROM for details on the verified application programs that are supported by this<br />
machine.
3.4 Importing Scanned Data to Computer<br />
2 From the File menu, select the command for selecting scan (source).<br />
The following screen is an example using the trial DocuWorks V4.0. The command name for selecting<br />
scan (source) differs according to the application program used.<br />
3 Select FX Network Scan from Sources and then click Select.<br />
4 From the File menu, select the command to import the image from the<br />
scanner.<br />
The following screen is an example using the trial DocuWorks V4.0. The command name to import<br />
image from the scanner differs according to the application program.<br />
The Network <strong>Scanner</strong> dialog box appears and scanners on the same network will be displayed.<br />
Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />
195
Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />
196<br />
3.4 Importing Scanned Data to Computer<br />
5 Select the scanner for connection from the list and then click Select<br />
<strong>Scanner</strong>.<br />
● When nothing is displayed, click the New Display button. There will be another search for the scanner.<br />
● Clicking the Change Display button will change the method of displaying the scanner name.<br />
● Only scanners within the same network will have their names automatically displayed. To display<br />
scanners on other networks, click the Change Display button to change settings.<br />
“3.6.1 Changing Network <strong>Scanner</strong> Driver Settings” (P. 208) for details on how to change scanner<br />
name and connect to other network.<br />
The dialog box to specify the mailbox will be displayed.<br />
6 Enter the mailbox password (001-200) for saving the documents for<br />
importing at Mailbox No. and the password at Password.<br />
● If the Save Password check box is checked, steps 5 to 7 can be omitted when you select the same<br />
mailbox the next time.<br />
● Clicking the Change <strong>Scanner</strong> button will return the screen to step 5 and you can re-select the scanner.<br />
7 Click Open Mailbox.<br />
A list of documents saved in the selected mailbox will be displayed.
3.4 Importing Scanned Data to Computer<br />
8 From the list, select the document for importing, and click Import.<br />
● You can select multiple documents.<br />
● You can also select Import, Update and Delete from the menu displayed by right-clicking on the<br />
list.<br />
Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />
197
Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />
198<br />
3.4 Importing Scanned Data to Computer<br />
Each item is explained below:<br />
<strong>Scanner</strong> Name Displays the name of the scanner which is connected.<br />
Mailbox No. Displays the number of the mailbox which is selected.<br />
File No. Displays the number which is automatically assigned by the<br />
machine.<br />
File Type Displays the type of document.<br />
Date/Time Displays the date and time of saving the document in the mailbox.<br />
No. (Pages) Displays the total number of sheets of documents. When Setting<br />
is clicked, if the Display mode under File List mode is set as<br />
Page in the Setting dialog box, Page is displayed and the number<br />
of pages will be displayed.<br />
Size Displays the size of documents.<br />
Type Displays the file format of documents. Select from JPG, MH, or<br />
MHR.<br />
Import button Imports the document.<br />
Delete button Deletes the document.<br />
Change <strong>Scanner</strong> button Changes the scanner to be connected. Returns to the screen of<br />
step 5.<br />
Update button Updates the document list in the selected mailbox.<br />
Setting button Displays the Setting dialog box and the way of displaying documents<br />
and importing documents can be changed.<br />
“3.6.1 Changing Network <strong>Scanner</strong> Driver Settings” (P. 208) for<br />
details on the method of changing.<br />
Cancel button Closes the color network driver.<br />
Help button Displays the on-line help of the color network scanner driver.
3.4 Importing Scanned Data to Computer<br />
When importing of documents begins, the following dialog box will be displayed and the scanned data<br />
will be transferred from the mailbox to the client.<br />
When the transfer is completed, the document is imported to the application program and the document<br />
in the mailbox deleted.<br />
● When scanning is done by pages, documents with pages not scanned will be displayed in the list<br />
preceded by “∗”.<br />
● Except for DocuWorks, the network scanner driver extends the compression data and transfers it to<br />
the application program in BMP format for almost all other application programs.<br />
3.4.2 Importing From Mailbox Viewer<br />
The following procedure describes how to import data saved in the mailbox of<br />
this machine to an application program.<br />
To import scanned data in the mailbox to the computer, you need to use the<br />
mailbox viewer.<br />
Wordpad for Windows 98 is used as an example here.<br />
“1.7 Installing the Network <strong>Scanner</strong> Utility” (P. 139) for details on how to install the mailbox viewer.<br />
Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />
199
Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />
200<br />
3.4 Importing Scanned Data to Computer<br />
Procedure<br />
1 Carry out steps 1 to 4 of “3.5.2 Checking/Deleting on Computer<br />
(Mailbox Viewer)” (P. 206) to activate the mailbox viewer.<br />
2 From the list, select the document for importing, then click Import.<br />
● You can select multiple documents.<br />
● You can also select Import, Update and Delete from the menu displayed by right-clicking on the<br />
list.<br />
When importing scanned documents from the mailbox viewer to the computer, the Import all existing<br />
documents must be checked for the Setting dialog box. When it is checked, the Update button of the<br />
mailbox viewer becomes Import.<br />
“3.6.2 Changing Mailbox Viewer Settings” (P. 212)<br />
Clicking the Import button will import all scanned data in the mailbox to save it to a specified directory<br />
(default: C:\temp).
3.4 Importing Scanned Data to Computer<br />
3.4.3 Importing Mailbox Data Using Centre-<br />
Ware Internet Services<br />
Procedure<br />
The following procedure describes how to import data saved in the mailbox of<br />
this machine using CentreWare Internet Services.<br />
For a brief description of CentreWare Internet Services, see “Part 1 <strong>Printer</strong>” “Chapter 5 Configuring<br />
From Computer (CentreWare Internet Services)” (P. 105).<br />
1 Activate the host device, and then the browser.<br />
2 Enter the IP address or Internet address of this machine at the address<br />
column of the browser, and then press Enter on the keyboard.<br />
The CentreWare Internet Services screen will be displayed.<br />
Check with the system administrator on the IP address and Internet address to be entered.<br />
3 Select Mailbox on the Properties tab.<br />
The screen for specifying the mailbox will be displayed.<br />
4 Enter the mailbox number (1-200) for saving the documents to be<br />
imported, and the password at Password.<br />
Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />
201
Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />
202<br />
3.4 Importing Scanned Data to Computer<br />
5 Click Display Document List.<br />
A list of documents saved in the mailbox will be displayed.<br />
6 Mark the checkbox of the document number to import, and click<br />
Retrieve.<br />
A screen for confirming retrieval of the mailbox document will be displayed.<br />
For details on operation, see On-line Help displayed by clicking Help on the bottom frame.
3.5 Checking/Deleting<br />
Scanned Data in Mailbox<br />
There are two ways to check/delete documents saved in the mailbox of this machine:<br />
● using this machine, delete scanned documents<br />
● using the computer, check/delete scanned documents (using mailbox viewer)<br />
This section describes the two different procedures.<br />
Scanned documents cannot be printed.<br />
3.5.1 Checking/Deleting on This Machine<br />
Procedure<br />
The procedure below describes how to check/delete documents saved in the<br />
mailbox of this machine using the touch panel display.<br />
1 Display the Basic Scanning screen.<br />
Basic Scanning<br />
Scan Options<br />
Image Quality/<br />
File Format<br />
2 Under Save to, select Mailbox.<br />
The Mailbox screen is displayed.<br />
You can also display the Mailbox screen by pressing the Job Status button on the control panel, and<br />
then selecting the Mailbox button on the Job Status screen.<br />
Menu<br />
Scan to: Output Color Scan Resolution 2 Sided Originals<br />
Auto 200dpi<br />
1 Sided<br />
Mailbox... Full Color<br />
300dpi<br />
2 Sided (H to H)<br />
Grayscale<br />
400dpi<br />
2 Sided (H to T)<br />
Job Template... Black<br />
600dpi<br />
More...<br />
Basic Scanning<br />
Scan Options<br />
Image Quality/<br />
File Format<br />
Menu<br />
Scan to: Output Color Scan Resolution 2 Sided Originals<br />
Auto 200dpi<br />
1 Sided<br />
Mailbox... Full Color<br />
300dpi<br />
2 Sided (H to H)<br />
Grayscale<br />
400dpi<br />
2 Sided (H to T)<br />
Job Template... Black<br />
600dpi<br />
More...<br />
Scanning With Mailbox<br />
3<br />
203
Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />
204<br />
3.5 Checking/Deleting Scanned Data in Mailbox<br />
3 Select the mailbox for selecting/deleting documents.<br />
Selecting the button will display the previous screen and the button the next screen. Or using<br />
the numeric keypad on the control panel, you can also enter the mailbox number at Go to to specify the<br />
mailbox directly.<br />
Mailbox Close<br />
001 002 003 004<br />
K Mailbox H Mailbox H Mailbox<br />
(Not in Use)<br />
005 006 007<br />
008<br />
(Not in Use) (Not in Use) (Not in Use) (Not in Use)<br />
009 010 011 012<br />
(Not in Use) (Not in Use)<br />
If there are documents in the mailbox, the number of documents saved in the mailbox will be displayed<br />
on the bottom right of the screen in No. of Docs: once the mailbox is selected.<br />
If the password has been set, the screen to enter the password will appear. Enter the password and<br />
then select the Confirm button. If you have forgotten the mailbox password, reset it in the System<br />
Administration Mode.<br />
4 Select Document List.<br />
(Not in Use) (Not in Use)<br />
The Mailbox xxx – Document List screen is displayed.<br />
Go to<br />
(001 - 200)<br />
Document List<br />
Mailbox Close<br />
001 002 003 004<br />
K Mailbox H Mailbox H Mailbox<br />
005 006 007<br />
(Not in Use)<br />
(Not in Use)<br />
009 010 011 012<br />
(Not in Use) (Not in Use)<br />
(Not in Use)<br />
(Not in Use)<br />
008<br />
(Not in Use)<br />
(Not in Use) (Not in Use)<br />
Go to<br />
(001 - 200)<br />
Document List<br />
No. of Docs: 10<br />
Mailbox Close<br />
001 002 003 004<br />
K Mailbox H Mailbox H Mailbox<br />
005 006 007<br />
(Not in Use)<br />
(Not in Use)<br />
009 010 011 012<br />
(Not in Use) (Not in Use)<br />
(Not in Use)<br />
(Not in Use)<br />
008<br />
(Not in Use)<br />
(Not in Use) (Not in Use)<br />
Go to<br />
(001 - 200)<br />
Document List<br />
No. of Docs: 10
3.5 Checking/Deleting Scanned Data in Mailbox<br />
5 Check the document or select the document for deleting.<br />
■Checking document:<br />
1 Check the document.<br />
Selecting the button will display the previous screen and the button the next screen.<br />
Mailbox 001- Document List<br />
No. Doc. No.-Type Stored Date Pages<br />
1 00002 - Store For Polling 2001/1/1 2:02 AM 1<br />
2 00004 - Scanned Docs. 2002/10/10 10:10 AM 100<br />
3 00006 - Mailbox Docs. 2002/12/31 11:59 AM 100<br />
4 03855 - Scanned Docs. 2000/7/7 4:45 PM 555<br />
5 65535 - Store For Polling 2000/7/30 8:31 PM 100<br />
■Deleting document:<br />
1 Select the document to be deleted, followed by Delete.<br />
Selecting the button will display the previous screen and the button the next screen. If the<br />
Select All button is selected, all the documents in the mailbox can be selected. You can select either<br />
just one or all documents.<br />
Mailbox 001- Document List<br />
No.<br />
Doc. No.-Type<br />
1 00002 - Store For Polling<br />
2 00004 - Scanned Docs.<br />
3 00006 - Mailbox Docs.<br />
4 03855 - Scanned Docs.<br />
5 65535 - Store For Polling<br />
Stored Date Pages<br />
2001/1/1 2:02 AM 1<br />
2002/10/10 10:10 AM 100<br />
2002/12/31 11:59 AM 100<br />
2000/7/7 4:45 PM 555<br />
2000/7/30 8:31 PM 100<br />
A screen for confirmation will be displayed.<br />
2 Check the contents on the screen, and then select Yes.<br />
Selecting the No button will return to the screen of step 1 .<br />
Mailbox 001-Show Document List<br />
No. The Document following document(s) No.-Type will Stored be deleted. Date No. of Pages<br />
Mailbox : 001 HID<br />
Doc. 1 00002 No.-Type - Store : For 00002-Store Polling 2001/1/1 For Polling2:02<br />
AM 1<br />
Stored<br />
2 00004<br />
Date<br />
- Scanned<br />
:<br />
Docs.<br />
2001/1/1<br />
2010/10/10<br />
2:02 AM<br />
Are you sure?<br />
10:10 AM 100<br />
3 00006 - Mailbox Docs. 2099/12/31 11:59 AM 100<br />
4 03855 - Scanned Docs. Yes2000/7/7 4:45 PM 555 No<br />
5 65535 - Store For Polling 2000/7/30 8:31 PM 100<br />
6 Select Close repeatedly until the Basic Scanning screen is displayed.<br />
Close<br />
No. of Docs : 10<br />
Select All<br />
Delete<br />
Close<br />
No.of Docs : 10<br />
Select All<br />
Delete<br />
Close<br />
No.of Docs: 10<br />
Select All<br />
Delete<br />
Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />
205
Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />
206<br />
3.5 Checking/Deleting Scanned Data in Mailbox<br />
3.5.2 Checking/Deleting on Computer (Mailbox<br />
Viewer)<br />
Procedure<br />
The procedure below describes how to check/delete documents saved in the<br />
mailbox of this machine by using the mailbox viewer.<br />
Wordpad for Windows 98 is used as an example here.<br />
1 Click the Start menu, followed by Programs, <strong>Fuji</strong> <strong>Xerox</strong>, Utility, and<br />
Mailbox Viewer 2.<br />
If other program folder name is specified during installation, it will replace Utility.<br />
2 From the list displayed, click the name of the scanner to be connected<br />
to, and then Select <strong>Scanner</strong>.<br />
Clicking the Change Display button will change the method of displaying the scanner name.<br />
<strong>Scanner</strong> names that will be automatically displayed include only DocumentCentre machines connected<br />
to the same network. To display DocumentCentre machines of other networks, click the Change<br />
Display button and then set the IP address and scanner name.<br />
“3.6.2 Changing Mailbox Viewer Settings” (P. 212) for details on how to change the scanner name<br />
and connect to other networks.
3.5 Checking/Deleting Scanned Data in Mailbox<br />
3 Enter the mailbox number (001-200) for saving the documents for<br />
importing at Mailbox No. and the password (within 20 characters) at<br />
Password.<br />
● If the Save Password check box is checked, the password will be saved if it is correct and this<br />
screen will be skipped the next time the Mailbox Viewer 2 is activated.<br />
● Clicking Change <strong>Scanner</strong> will return the screen to step 2 and you can re-select the scanner.<br />
4 Click Open Mailbox.<br />
A list of documents saved in the selected mailbox will be displayed.<br />
5 Check the document in the list.<br />
To delete document, select the document, followed by the Delete button.<br />
The On-line Help displayed by clicking the Help button for details on each option of the mailbox<br />
viewer.<br />
Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />
207
Scanning With Mailbox 208<br />
3<br />
3.6<br />
Changing Network <strong>Scanner</strong><br />
Utility Settings<br />
Network <strong>Scanner</strong> Utility consists of the network scanner driver and the mailbox viewer.<br />
This section describes the procedure to change the Network <strong>Scanner</strong> Utility settings.<br />
3.6.1 Changing Network <strong>Scanner</strong> Driver Settings<br />
Configuring how to display scanner name<br />
When selecting the scanner, you can change the way to display the scanner<br />
name shown in the list.<br />
You can configure the setting on the dialog box displayed by clicking the Change<br />
Display button on the dialog box for selecting the scanner to be connected.
3.6 Changing Network <strong>Scanner</strong> Utility Settings<br />
Configure the necessary settings by referring to the explanation below:<br />
Use network Selecting this item will search the scanners in the following<br />
order. When the host name in respect of the IP address of<br />
the connected scanner has been set, it will be displayed as a<br />
scanner name.<br />
1 “Hosts” file (without extension) in Windows system directory<br />
● The Hosts file is in \Windows for Windows 95, Windows 98,<br />
Window Me, in \Winnt\System32\drivers\etc for Windows NT<br />
4.0, Windows 2000, and in \Windows\system32\drivers\etc for<br />
Windows XP. However, the directory name in which Windows is<br />
installed may differ according to the environment used.<br />
● To display the host name using the Hosts file, open the Hosts file<br />
with programs like Notepad, and separate the IP address and<br />
the host name by adding a line.<br />
2 DNS (Domain Name Server)<br />
The domain name is also displayed when registering with<br />
DNS. When the corresponding host name is not registered, it<br />
is displayed as “Machine Name (IP address)”.<br />
Use local file When this item is selected and the file is specified, the host<br />
name described by the file is displayed as the scanner name.<br />
Describe the file to be specified, in the same format as the<br />
Hosts file format.<br />
Example:<br />
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx DocumentCentre C400 <strong>Scanner</strong><br />
Other network scanners When you connect to scanners in other networks, configure<br />
the setting as follows:<br />
In order to connect to scanners in other networks, communication<br />
by TCP/IP is needed.<br />
1 Check the Display other network scanners check box,<br />
and then click the Add button.<br />
2<br />
Enter the IP address of the scanner to be connected to<br />
and the corresponding scanner name in the following dialog<br />
box, and then click the OK button.<br />
Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />
209
Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />
210<br />
3.6 Changing Network <strong>Scanner</strong> Utility Settings<br />
Configuring how to import scanned data<br />
You can change the way of importing and displaying documents when importing<br />
documents from the mailbox.<br />
Configure the way to import documents from the dialog box displayed by clicking<br />
the Setting button on the dialog box for selecting the documents to be imported.<br />
Configure the necessary settings by referring to the explanation below:<br />
Import Order Specifies the order of importing documents.<br />
When New → Old is set, documents will be imported from<br />
the bottom document if Display Mode is set as By file and<br />
from the last page of the bottom document if set as By page.<br />
When Old → New is set, the order will be reversed.<br />
Display Mode Sets whether to display the scanned documents in the mailbox<br />
by file or by page. When the application program used<br />
does not support documents with multiple pages, select By<br />
page to import the pages one by one.<br />
Negative Image Reverses the white and black portions of black and white<br />
images. Use this feature when you want the document<br />
imported from the application program to be a negative<br />
image.<br />
Settings are invalid in the case of images read as full color images<br />
or grayscale images.<br />
Add Display Items Add the following items to the Document Settings screen.<br />
The added items may not be displayed depending on the<br />
machine model.<br />
File Name<br />
Location: The sender's Email address on the Email Document.
3.6 Changing Network <strong>Scanner</strong> Utility Settings<br />
Temporary Save as Specifies the temporary directory for saving documents in<br />
the process of being imported. If possible, specify a directory<br />
with a large capacity.<br />
In order to connect to scanners in other networks, communication<br />
by TCP/IP is needed. When the network scanner driver is used<br />
together with Able Model PR II or DocumentCentre Series scanner<br />
drivers, use their respective specific directories for Temporary<br />
save. If the same directory is used, the scanner drivers may not<br />
function correctly.<br />
Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />
211
Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />
212<br />
3.6 Changing Network <strong>Scanner</strong> Utility Settings<br />
3.6.2 Changing Mailbox Viewer Settings<br />
You can configure how to operate the mailbox viewer and the import features.<br />
To configure these settings, click the Setting button on the Mailbox Viewer dialog<br />
box.<br />
Configure the necessary settings by referring to the explanation below:<br />
Get information when<br />
opening Windows<br />
Retrieves the document information of the mailbox when the<br />
Mailbox Viewer dialog box is opened from the task bar.<br />
Update Time Specifies the interval to retrieve document information in the<br />
mailbox.<br />
The range of setting is 1 to 60 minutes.<br />
Import existing files when<br />
updating<br />
Imports all documents when retrieving document information<br />
in the mailbox.<br />
Checking this check box will change the Update button in the<br />
Mailbox Viewer dialog box to Import button. Also, the Import<br />
Settings button becomes enabled.<br />
Refer to the following page for details on the import settings.<br />
Notice mode Specifies how to notify that new documents have been created<br />
at the time of updating when the Mailbox Viewer is minimized<br />
in the taskbar.<br />
Animation: Notifies by change of icon.<br />
Sound: Notifies by sound.<br />
Can also specify WAV file.<br />
If your computer is not installed with a sound card, WAV files<br />
cannot be specified.<br />
Display File Type Sets the type of documents to be displayed in the Mailbox<br />
Viewer dialog box.<br />
Scanned Image: Documents imported by this machine.<br />
Received Fax: Faxed documents received from other fax<br />
machines.<br />
Stored for Polling: Documents saved for polling.<br />
Received Email: Documents received from outside by E-mail.<br />
Add Display Items Add the following items to the Document Settings screen.<br />
The added items may not be displayed depending on the<br />
machine model.<br />
File Name<br />
Location: The sender’s Email address on the Email Document.
Import Settings<br />
Configures how to import scanned data.<br />
3.6 Changing Network <strong>Scanner</strong> Utility Settings<br />
Configure the necessary settings by referring to the explanation below:<br />
Import Order Select the order of importing images.<br />
When Old to New is selected, documents will be imported<br />
from the bottom. Conversely, when New to Old is selected,<br />
the order will be reversed.<br />
Compress Format: B&W All the pages of the imported document will be saved as<br />
TIFF files. Select the compression type from MMR or MH.<br />
Compress Format: Gray/<br />
Color<br />
Compress Rate: Gray/<br />
Color<br />
Select whether or not to compress. The only format available<br />
is JPEG.<br />
This setting will not be available when compressing image<br />
imported from a network scanner.<br />
Good quality, large size: Data size increases but image quality<br />
improves.<br />
Standard: Standard compression rate.<br />
Poor quality, small size: Image quality deteriorates but data<br />
size decreases.<br />
Saving method Save multi-page as a file: Saves multi-page as TIFF.<br />
Save each page as a file: Saves each page as a file inside<br />
the folder. Black and white pages will be saved as single<br />
page TIFF format. Will be saved as JPEG format when Compress<br />
(JPEG) has been selected for Compress Format:<br />
Gray/Color and as BMP format when Do not compress has<br />
been selected.<br />
Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />
213
Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />
214<br />
3.6 Changing Network <strong>Scanner</strong> Utility Settings<br />
Adding to Folder Name The file and folder names are as follows:<br />
File Name, location...: File name or location - IP address of<br />
scanner - File No. - Date/Time<br />
Entered string, IP address..: Specified string - IP address of<br />
scanner device - File No. -<br />
Date/Time<br />
Save in Specifies the location to save the imported documents.<br />
Select a drive with a large capacity.
4Scanning With Job<br />
Template<br />
4.1 How to Scan................................................................................... 216<br />
4.1.1 Flow of Scanning ............................................................ 216<br />
4.1.2 Saving in Server (Specifying Job Template) ................... 216<br />
4.2 Printing Job Template List.............................................................. 218
Scanning With Job Template<br />
4<br />
216<br />
4.1<br />
How to Scan<br />
This section describes how to scan using Job Template.<br />
4.1.1 Flow of Scanning<br />
The flow of scanning using Job Template is as follows:<br />
1 Loading documents<br />
● Step 1 of “4.1.2 Saving in Server (Specifying Job Template)” (P. 216)<br />
2<br />
Specifying Job Template and then scanning the document.<br />
● Steps 2 to 5 of “4.1.2 Saving in Server (Specifying Job Template)” (P. 216)<br />
CentreWare Scanning Services Installation <strong>Guide</strong> for details on CentreWare Scanning Services.<br />
4.1.2 Saving in Server (Specifying Job Template)<br />
Procedure<br />
Specify the file (Job Template) with settings like the import settings and transfer<br />
server information, and then scan the document.<br />
The scanned data will be changed to TIFF or JPEG format and then automatically<br />
transferred to the server. The Job Template will use the Job Template Utility<br />
of CentreWare Internet Services or CentreWare Scanning Services and will be<br />
created on the computer and then saved in the server. This machine will automatically<br />
retrieve the job template saved in the server.<br />
● CentreWare Scanning Services Installation <strong>Guide</strong> for details on CentreWare Scanning Services.<br />
● CentreWare Internet Services help for details on the CentreWare Internet Services. You can display<br />
help by selecting Job Templates in the CWIS screen and then clicking on help.<br />
1 Load the document to be scanned.<br />
“2.2 Loading Documents” (P. 147) for details on loading documents.
2 Display the Basic Scanning screen.<br />
Basic Scanning<br />
Scan Options<br />
3 Select Job Template.<br />
Image Quality/<br />
File Format<br />
4.1 How to Scan<br />
If the Job Template button is not displayed on the screen, see “1.5 Configuring for Using Job Template”<br />
(P. 133) to check the settings.<br />
4 Select the job template with the needed import settings.<br />
If any created job template is still not displayed, select the Refresh button.<br />
Selecting the Template Description button can display description of the job template. However, if no<br />
explanation has been added when creating the job template, nothing will be displayed.<br />
5 Press Start.<br />
The document will be scanned and the scanned data stored in the hard disk and then automatically<br />
transferred to the server.<br />
Menu<br />
Scan to: Output Color Scan Resolution 2 Sided Originals<br />
Auto 200dpi<br />
1 Sided<br />
Mailbox... Full Color<br />
300dpi<br />
2 Sided (H to H)<br />
Grayscale<br />
400dpi<br />
2 Sided (H to T)<br />
Job Template... Black<br />
600dpi<br />
More...<br />
Basic Scanning<br />
Scan Options<br />
Image Quality/<br />
File Format<br />
Menu<br />
Scan to: Output Color Scan Resolution 2 Sided Originals<br />
Auto 200dpi<br />
1 Sided<br />
Mailbox... Full Color<br />
300dpi<br />
2 Sided (H to H)<br />
Grayscale<br />
400dpi<br />
2 Sided (H to T)<br />
Job Template... Black<br />
600dpi<br />
More...<br />
Job Template<br />
001 K Test 002 Ha Test<br />
003 Hi Test<br />
004 E Test<br />
Refresh<br />
Close<br />
Go to<br />
(001 - 250)<br />
Template<br />
Description<br />
Scanning With Job Template<br />
4<br />
217
Scanning With Job Template<br />
4<br />
218<br />
4.2<br />
Printing Job Template List<br />
This section describes how to print out the Job Template List on this machine.<br />
The Job Template List contains settings of the server used for storing the job template and<br />
which is set by CentreWare Internet Services or CentreWare Scanning Services.<br />
Print out the Job Template List via the touch panel display.<br />
“6.6 Printing Reports/Lists” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier) for details on using the printer.
5E-mail Scanning<br />
5.1 Scanning Document to Send as E-mail ......................................... 220<br />
5.1.1 Requirements ................................................................. 220<br />
5.1.2 Scan and Mail................................................................. 220<br />
5.1.3 Registering Dial Directory............................................... 223
E-mail Scanning<br />
5<br />
220<br />
5.1<br />
Scanning Document to<br />
Send as E-mail<br />
You can scan document and send it as an e-mail at the same time using this machine. This<br />
feature is known as “E-mail Scanning”. You can also set the maximum size of the e-mail.<br />
● You need to install the optional E-mail Kit on this machine in order to use the E-mail Scanning feature.<br />
● Scanned documents cannot be printed.<br />
5.1.1 Requirements<br />
To send the document as an e-mail, you need to set up the following. Check with<br />
your system administrator or network administrator to check if the settings have<br />
been configured.<br />
Setting network environment and mail server<br />
● registering user account<br />
● setting mail server<br />
“4.7 E-mail Printing” (P. 91) of “Part 1 <strong>Printer</strong>” for details on setting the mail server.<br />
5.1.2 Scan and Mail<br />
Procedure<br />
The procedure to scan a document and e-mail it is as follows:<br />
1 Load the document to be scanned.<br />
“2.2 Loading Documents” (P. 147) for details on loading documents.<br />
2 Display the Basic Scanning screen.
3 Under Save to, select E-mail.<br />
Basic Scanning<br />
Scan Options<br />
The E-mail screen is displayed.<br />
Image Quality/<br />
File Format<br />
Scan to: Output Color Scan Resolution 2 Sided Originals<br />
E-mail<br />
Auto 200dpi<br />
1 Sided<br />
Full Color<br />
300dpi<br />
2 Sided (H to H)<br />
Mailbox... Grayscale<br />
400dpi<br />
2 Sided (H to T)<br />
Job Template...<br />
Black<br />
600dpi<br />
More...<br />
4 Specify the recipient of the scanned data.<br />
The options to specify are as follows:<br />
■When the contents is Same as Sender:<br />
5.1 Scanning Document to Send as E-mail<br />
Item Description<br />
Default<br />
value<br />
To Enter the e-mail address. You can also use the dial directory.<br />
Not Set<br />
Subject Enter the subject of the mail. Auto Set<br />
From Register the name of the sender. This sender’s name will<br />
appear on the Send Header and Cover Note.<br />
Machine Email<br />
Address<br />
Reply To Enter the e-mail address of the recipient. Same as<br />
Sender<br />
Errors-To Specify whether to send an Error Mail when the data cannot<br />
be sent due to a wrong address being set or an error<br />
that occurred.<br />
E-mail<br />
To: (Not Set)<br />
Subject: (Auto Set)<br />
From: (Not Set)<br />
Reply To: (Same as Sender)<br />
Errors-To: (Same as Sender)<br />
Cancel<br />
Same as<br />
Sender<br />
Selecting Same as Sender will set the contents similar to the sender.<br />
Menu<br />
Save<br />
Same as<br />
Sender<br />
Open<br />
Address Book<br />
Keyboard<br />
E-mail Scanning<br />
5<br />
221
E-mail Scanning<br />
5<br />
222<br />
5.1 Scanning Document to Send as E-mail<br />
■When using address list:<br />
Select Open Address Book.<br />
Selecting Enter Number and then using the numeric keypad to enter the speed dial number at Go to will<br />
display the specified number at the beginning of the dial directory list. You also specify the index on the<br />
screen displayed by clicking the ABCDE, FGHIJ, KLMNO, PQRST, UVWXYZ, 0 – 9 tabs.<br />
Selecting the button will display the previous screen and the button the next screen.<br />
Address:<br />
001 <strong>Fuji</strong> <strong>Xerox</strong> 002 Akira Endo 003<br />
004<br />
007<br />
005<br />
008<br />
Only the address for e-mail can be used.<br />
“5.1.3 Registering Dial Directory” (P. 223) for details on setting the dial directory.<br />
■When using the keyboard to enter:<br />
Select Keyboard.<br />
The display might differ according to the ROM versions.<br />
Using the keyboard, enter the characters.<br />
5 Select Save.<br />
The display will return to the Basic Scanning screen.<br />
6 If necessary, configure the scan settings.<br />
006<br />
009<br />
010 011 012<br />
Cancel<br />
Address List ABCDE FGHIJ KLMNO PQRST UVWXYZ 0-9<br />
Alphabet<br />
Symbol<br />
a<br />
h<br />
o<br />
v<br />
b<br />
i<br />
p<br />
w<br />
c<br />
j<br />
q<br />
x<br />
d<br />
k<br />
r<br />
y<br />
e<br />
l<br />
s<br />
z<br />
Cancel<br />
“3.3 Configuring Scan Settings” (P. 160) for details on configuring the scan settings.<br />
f<br />
m<br />
t<br />
7 Press Start.<br />
Scanning of the document will begin and the scanned data will be sent to the specified recipient.<br />
g<br />
n<br />
u<br />
@<br />
+<br />
/<br />
.<br />
-<br />
<<br />
_<br />
=<br />
><br />
Save<br />
Go to<br />
(001-500)<br />
Save<br />
Backspace<br />
Shift
5.1.3 Registering Dial Directory<br />
Registering directory<br />
Procedure<br />
5.1 Scanning Document to Send as E-mail<br />
1 On the control panel, press Password/System Settings.<br />
Either the System Settings screen or System Administrator – Password Entry screen will be displayed.<br />
● The System Administrator – Password Entry screen will be displayed if the system administrator<br />
password has been set. If the password has not been set, pressing the Password/System Settings<br />
button will display the System Settings screen.<br />
● If the System Administrator – Password Entry screen is displayed, see “5.2.1 Entering the System<br />
Administration Mode” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier) for details on entering<br />
the password. After the password has been entered, selecting the System Settings button will display<br />
the System Settings screen.<br />
2 Select Setup Menu.<br />
System Settings<br />
The Setup Menu screen is displayed.<br />
3 Select Address Book.<br />
Setup Menu<br />
System Settings<br />
Auditron<br />
Administration<br />
The Address Book screen is displayed.<br />
Setup Menu<br />
Mailbox Address Book<br />
Close<br />
System Administrator<br />
Password<br />
Close<br />
E-mail Scanning<br />
5<br />
223
E-mail Scanning<br />
5<br />
224<br />
5.1 Scanning Document to Send as E-mail<br />
4 Select the preferred address number, followed by Create/Delete.<br />
Selecting the button will display the previous screen and the button the next screen. You can<br />
also use the numeric keypad to enter a 3-digit dial number to Go to to specify the address number<br />
directly.<br />
Address Book<br />
Address No. Address<br />
001<br />
(Not in Use)<br />
002<br />
(Not in Use)<br />
003<br />
(Not in Use)<br />
004<br />
(Not in Use)<br />
005 (Not in Use)<br />
The Address Number NNN – Create/Delete screen is displayed.<br />
5 Select E-mail and then Detailed Settings.<br />
Adrress Number 001 - Create/Delete<br />
Address Type E-mail Address<br />
Fax<br />
1111<br />
Recipient Name<br />
iFAX<br />
1111<br />
Index<br />
E-mail<br />
1111<br />
6 Select the option for registering, followed by Change Settings.<br />
Selecting the button will display the previous screen and the button the next screen.<br />
Address Number 001 - Create/Delete (E-mail)<br />
Items Current Settings<br />
1. E-mail Address (Not Set)<br />
2. Recipient Name<br />
(Address Not Entered)<br />
3. Index<br />
(Address Not Entered)<br />
■1. E-mail Address<br />
Use the keyboard and numeric keypad displayed to enter the item.<br />
■2. Recipient Name<br />
Use the keyboard and numeric keypad displayed to enter the item.<br />
■3. Index<br />
Close<br />
Go to<br />
(001-500)<br />
Create/Delete<br />
Close<br />
Detailed<br />
Settings<br />
Close<br />
Reset All<br />
Settings<br />
Change<br />
Settings<br />
Use the keyboard and numeric keypad displayed to enter the item.
Changing/Deleting the registered contents<br />
Procedure<br />
5.1 Scanning Document to Send as E-mail<br />
1 On the control panel, press Password/System Settings.<br />
Either the System Settings screen or System Administrator – Password Entry screen will be displayed.<br />
● The System Administrator – Password Entry screen will be displayed if the system administrator<br />
password has been set. If the password has not been set, pressing the Password/System Settings button<br />
will display the System Settings screen.<br />
● If the System Administrator – Password Entry screen is displayed, see “5.2.1 Entering the System<br />
Administration Mode” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier) for details on entering the<br />
password. After the password has been entered, selecting the System Settings button will display the<br />
System Settings screen.<br />
2 Select Setup Menu.<br />
System Settings<br />
The Setup Menu screen is displayed.<br />
3 Select Address Book.<br />
Setup Menu<br />
System Settings<br />
Auditron<br />
Administration<br />
The Address Book screen is displayed.<br />
Setup Menu<br />
Mailbox Address Book<br />
Close<br />
System Administrator<br />
Password<br />
Close<br />
E-mail Scanning<br />
5<br />
225
E-mail Scanning<br />
5<br />
226<br />
5.1 Scanning Document to Send as E-mail<br />
4 Select the address number to change or delete, followed by Create/<br />
Delete.<br />
Selecting the button will display the previous screen and the button the next screen. You can<br />
also use the numeric keypad to enter a 3-digit dial number to Go to to specify the address number<br />
directly.<br />
Address Book<br />
Address No. Address<br />
001<br />
soumu@mail.net<br />
002<br />
(Not in Use)<br />
003<br />
(Not in Use)<br />
004<br />
(Not in Use)<br />
005 (Not in Use)<br />
The Address Number NNN – Create/Delete screen is displayed.<br />
5 Select E-mail and then Detailed Settings.<br />
Adrress Number 001 - Create/Delete<br />
Address Type E-mail Address<br />
soumu@mail.net<br />
Fax<br />
1111<br />
Recipient Name<br />
iFAX<br />
1111<br />
Index<br />
E-mail<br />
S1111<br />
6 ■When changing the registered contents:<br />
Select the item to change, followed by Change Settings.<br />
Selecting the button will display the previous screen and the button the next screen.<br />
Address Number 001 - Create/Delete (E-mail)<br />
Items Current Settings<br />
1. E-mail Address soumu@mail.net<br />
2. Recipient Name<br />
(Address Not Entered)<br />
3. Index<br />
S<br />
“Registering directory” (P. 223) for details on the procedure.<br />
Close<br />
Go to<br />
(001-500)<br />
Create/Delete<br />
Close<br />
Detailed<br />
Settings<br />
Close<br />
Reset All<br />
Settings<br />
Change<br />
Settings
5.1 Scanning Document to Send as E-mail<br />
■When deleting all items of the registered contents:<br />
1<br />
Select Reset All Settings.<br />
Address Number 001 - Create/Delete (E-mail)<br />
Items Current Settings<br />
1. E-mail Address soumu@mail.net<br />
2. Recipient Name<br />
(Address Not Entered)<br />
3. Index<br />
S<br />
A screen for confirmation will be displayed.<br />
2<br />
Check the contents on the screen, and then select Yes.<br />
Selecting the No button will return to the screen of step 1.<br />
Address Number 001 - Cleate/Delete (E-mail)<br />
Items<br />
All settings in Address Number 001 will be reset.<br />
1.Address (E-mail Add)<br />
2.Recipient Are you Name sure?<br />
3.Index<br />
Yes No<br />
All the contents of the selected speed dial number will be deleted.<br />
Reset All<br />
Settings<br />
Change<br />
Settings<br />
7 Select Close repeatedly until the System Settings screen is displayed.<br />
8 Select Close.<br />
The machine will reboot and the display will return to the previous screen prior to this procedure.<br />
Close<br />
Close<br />
Reset All<br />
Settings<br />
Change Settings<br />
E-mail Scanning<br />
5<br />
227
Part 3 Appendix
1Appendix<br />
A Main Specifications ........................................................................ 232<br />
A.1 Product Specifications .................................................... 232<br />
A.2 Printable Area................................................................. 233<br />
A.3 Internal Fonts.................................................................. 234<br />
A.4 Interface Board (for Token Ring)..................................... 235<br />
B <strong>Printer</strong>/<strong>Scanner</strong> Settings (System Administration Mode)............... 236<br />
C Precautions/Limitations.................................................................. 237<br />
C.1 SMB................................................................................ 237<br />
C.2 TCP/IP (LPD).................................................................. 239<br />
C.3 NetWare.......................................................................... 241<br />
C.4 Scan Features ................................................................ 244<br />
C.5 Print Auditron .................................................................. 245<br />
D Troubleshooting When Using SMB ................................................ 246<br />
D.1 Cannot Find <strong>Printer</strong> ........................................................ 246<br />
D.2 Cannot Print.................................................................... 247<br />
D.3 Cannot Delete Documents From <strong>Printer</strong> Window........... 247<br />
D.4 Cannot Auto Download <strong>Printer</strong> Driver............................. 248<br />
E Troubleshooting When Using TCP/IP............................................. 249<br />
E.1 For Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows Me.................. 249<br />
E.2 For Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP ....... 250<br />
F Troubleshooting When Using NetWare .......................................... 251<br />
F.1 When Not Printed ........................................................... 251<br />
F.2 When “Switch off the power” Appears ............................ 254<br />
F.3 When Target Print Result Is Not Obtained...................... 254<br />
F.4 No Notification ................................................................ 255<br />
G Troubleshooting for CentreWare Internet Services ........................ 256<br />
H Automatic Gradation Adjustment ................................................... 257<br />
I Glossary......................................................................................... 258<br />
J Q & A ............................................................................................. 260
Appendix<br />
232<br />
A Main<br />
Specifications<br />
This section describes the main specifications of the printing feature.<br />
A.1 Product Specifications<br />
Type Console<br />
Laser printer<br />
Printing system Semiconductor laser system<br />
Xerography<br />
Printing speed Conditions: A4<br />
(continuous printing of same contents)<br />
• For DocumentCentre C400 40 sheets/minute (black/white),<br />
22 sheets/minute (color)<br />
• For DocumentCentre C320 32 sheets/minute (black/white),<br />
16 sheets/minute (color)<br />
• For DocumentCentre C240 24 sheets/minute (black/white),<br />
13 sheets/minute (color)<br />
Warm-up time About 45 seconds<br />
(temperature at 20°C, 60% humidity)<br />
Resolution Color: 600 dpi, Black/White: 1,200 dpi<br />
(For text printing, equivalent to 2,400 dpi)<br />
We regret that improvements in specifications/appearance of the product may be made without prior<br />
notice.
A.2 Printable Area<br />
The print area when using PCL printer driver for printing is as follows:<br />
For non-standard sizes and sizes smaller than A3:<br />
A Main Specifications<br />
For non-standard sizes, the left and right unprintable areas becomes 4.5 mm when the width of the<br />
paper is 306 mm or more.<br />
For 12×18":<br />
Appendix<br />
233
Appendix<br />
234<br />
A Main Specifications<br />
A.3 Internal Fonts<br />
The following fonts can be used for normal operations.<br />
“6.6 Printing Reports/Lists” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier) for details on the<br />
optional PostScript fonts.<br />
Stroke fonts (for HP-GL/2 only)<br />
● European stroke fonts<br />
Outline fonts<br />
The relationship between the installed outline fonts and the Page Description<br />
Languages or emulation mode is as follows.<br />
In addition, the installed outline fonts cannot be used for PostScript (option) for<br />
normal operations.<br />
■Europian<br />
CG Times LetterGothic CourierPS<br />
CG Times It LetterGothic It CourierPS Ob<br />
CG Times Bd LetterGothic Bd CourierPS Bd<br />
CG Times BdIt Albertus Md CourierPS BdOb<br />
Univers Md Albertus XBd SymbolPS<br />
Univers MdIt Clarendon Cd Palatino Roman<br />
Univers Bd Coronet Palatino It<br />
Univers BdIt Marigold Palatino Bd<br />
Univers MdCd Arial Palatino BdIt<br />
Univers MdCdIt Arial It ITCBookman Lt<br />
Univers BdCd Arial Bd ITCBookman LtIt<br />
Univers BdCdIt Arial BdIt ITCBookmanDm<br />
AntiqueOlv Times New ITCBookmanDm It<br />
AntiqueOlv It Times New It HelveticaNr<br />
AntiqueOlv Bd Times New Bd HelveticaNr Ob<br />
CG Omega Times New BdIt HelveticaNr Bd<br />
CG Omega It Symbol HelveticaNrBdOb<br />
CG Omega Bd Windings N C Schbk Roman<br />
CG Omega BdIt Line <strong>Printer</strong> N C Schbk It<br />
GaramondAntiqua Times Roman N C Schbk Bd<br />
Garamond Krsv Times It N C Schbk BdIt
Garamond Hlb Times Bd ITC A G Go Bk<br />
GaramondKrsvHlb Times BdIt ITC A G Go BkOb<br />
Courier Helvetica ITC A G Go Dm<br />
Courier It Helvetica Ob ITC A G Go DmOb<br />
Courier Bd Helvetica Bd ZapfC MdIt<br />
Courier BdIt Helvetica BdOb ZapfCDingbats<br />
A.4 Interface Board (for Token Ring)<br />
This section describes the optional interface board (for Token Ring).<br />
Shape of the connector<br />
Pin arrangement<br />
STP connector specifications<br />
Pin No. Name Pin No. Name<br />
1 RX-A 6 RX-B<br />
2 N.C. 7 N.C.<br />
3 N.C. 8 N.C.<br />
4 N.C. 9 TX-A<br />
5 TX-B -<br />
UTP connector specifications<br />
Pin No. Name Pin No. Name<br />
1 N.C. 5 RX-A<br />
2 N.C. 6 TX-B<br />
3 TX-A 7 N.C.<br />
4 RX-B 8 N.C.<br />
A Main Specifications<br />
Appendix<br />
235
Appendix<br />
236<br />
B <strong>Printer</strong>/<strong>Scanner</strong><br />
Settings<br />
(System Administration<br />
Mode)<br />
The various printer/scanner settings can be changed in the System Administration Mode to<br />
make them easier to use.<br />
See “Chapter 5 System Administration Mode Settings” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong><br />
<strong>Guide</strong> (Copier) for details on System Administration Mode and the options that can be set.
C Precautions/Limitations<br />
C.1 SMB<br />
The precautions/limitations of using SMB are as follows:<br />
Setting up of this machine<br />
● Be very careful in setting up IP addresses. IP addresses are addresses controlled<br />
as an entire system. Consult your network administrator before defining<br />
any address.<br />
● Depending on the network environment used, it may be necessary to set the<br />
subnet mask and gateway. Consult your network administrator before defining<br />
the needed item.<br />
● If setting the port to Enabled leads to insufficient memory, the port status may<br />
be set to Disabled automatically. In this case, either set the port to Disabled<br />
when it is not used or change the memory allocation capacity.<br />
● Specify the size for the receive buffer memory (SMB Spool) as required by the<br />
environment in use. If the size of the receive buffer memory (SMB Spool) is<br />
smaller than the transmitted data, the data may not be received.<br />
Setting up of host machine<br />
● Be very careful in setting up IP addresses. IP addresses are addresses controlled<br />
as an entire system. Consult your network administrator before defining<br />
any address.<br />
● Consult the Network Information Service (NIS) administrator when setting network<br />
(such as IP address) by a host being used under NIS.<br />
Switching off power<br />
Take note of the following points when switching off the power of this machine:<br />
■When SMB Spool is set to Memory<br />
All print data spooled to the printer memory, including data in the process of<br />
printing, will be deleted. When the power is switched on again, the print data will<br />
not be found.<br />
However, if the power is switched off immediately after the print data has been<br />
sent, the print data may be stored in the host device. In this case, when the<br />
power is switched on again, the stored print data will be printed first even if new<br />
print data has been sent.<br />
■When SMB Spool is set to Hard Disk<br />
All print data spooled to the hard disk of this machine, including data in the process<br />
of printing, will be saved. When the power is turned on again, the stored<br />
print data will be printed first even if new print data has been sent.<br />
Appendix<br />
237
Appendix<br />
238<br />
C Precautions/Limitations<br />
■When SMB Spool is set to Off (non-spool mode)<br />
All print data spooled to the receive buffer of this machine, including data in the<br />
process of printing, will be deleted. When the power is turned on again, the print<br />
data will not be found. However, if the power is turned off immediately after the<br />
print data has been sent, the print data may be stored in the host device. In this<br />
case, when the power is turned on again, the stored print data will be printed first<br />
even if new print data has been sent.<br />
During printing<br />
■When SMB Spool is set to Hard Disk or Memory<br />
If the print data is larger than the hard disk or the remaining memory capacity at<br />
the point of receiving print data, the data will not be received.<br />
When the print data has exceeded the receiving capacity, some host devices may re-send the data<br />
immediately. When this occurs, the host device appears as if it has crashed. To rectify the situation,<br />
stop the host device from sending print data.<br />
■When SMB Spool is set to Off (non-spool mode)<br />
If the machine has accepted a print request from a host device, it cannot accept<br />
any print request from other host device.<br />
■When the IP address or computer name of the host device is changed<br />
When the IP address or computer name of the host device is changed, it may not<br />
be able to process enquiry or delete request from this machine correctly. Ensure<br />
that this machine is free of print data in the receive buffer, and then turn the<br />
power off/on.<br />
You can use the printer control panel to stop/eject print data spooled to the receive buffer of this<br />
machine. For details on the way to do this, see “7.2.8 Forcibly Outputting Data Wait Documents” in<br />
“Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier) or “3.6.2 Canceling Printing From <strong>Printer</strong>” (P. 58)<br />
of “Part 1 <strong>Printer</strong>”.<br />
■Deleting jobs<br />
For Windows NT 4.0 not installed with Service Pack 4 and later, you cannot<br />
delete jobs. If you delete jobs while the computer is receiving data, an error message<br />
will be displayed. In this case, the Retry button on the error message dialog<br />
box will not be effective.
C.2 TCP/IP (LPD)<br />
The precautions/limitations of using TCP/IP (LPD) are as follows:<br />
Setting up this machine<br />
C Precautions/Limitations<br />
● Be very careful in setting up IP addresses. IP addresses are addresses controlled<br />
as an entire system. Consult your network administrator before defining<br />
any address.<br />
● Depending on the network environment used, it may be necessary to set the subnet<br />
mask and gateway. Consult your network administrator before defining the<br />
needed item.<br />
● If setting the port to Enabled leads to insufficient memory, the port status may<br />
be set to Disabled automatically. In this case, either set the port to Disabled<br />
when it is not used or change the memory allocation capacity.<br />
● Specify the size for the receive buffer memory (LPD spool) as required by the<br />
environment in use. If the size of the receive buffer memory (LPD spool) is<br />
smaller than the transmitted data, the data may not be received.<br />
Setting up host machine<br />
● Be very careful in setting up IP addresses. IP addresses are addresses controlled<br />
as an entire system. Consult your network administrator before defining<br />
any address.<br />
● Consult the Network Information Service (NIS) administrator when setting network<br />
(such as IP address) by a host being used under NIS.<br />
Switching off power<br />
Take note of the following points when turning off the power of this machine:<br />
■When LPD Spool is set to Memory<br />
All print data spooled to the printer memory, including data in the process of<br />
printing, will be deleted. When the power is turned on again, the print data will<br />
not be found.<br />
However, if the power is turned off immediately after the print data has been<br />
sent, the print data may be stored in the host device. In this case, when the<br />
power is turned on again, the stored print data will be printed first even if new<br />
print data has been sent.<br />
■When LPD Spool is set to Hard Disk<br />
All print data spooled to the hard disk of this machine, including data in the process<br />
of printing, will be saved. When the power is turned on again, the stored<br />
print data will be printed first even if new print data has been sent.<br />
Appendix<br />
239
Appendix<br />
240<br />
C Precautions/Limitations<br />
■When LPD Spool is set to Off (non-spool mode)<br />
All print data spooled to the receive buffer of this machine, including data in the<br />
process of printing, will be deleted. When the power is turned on again, the print<br />
data will not be found.<br />
However, if the power is turned off immediately after the print data has been<br />
sent, the print data may be stored in the host device. In this case, when the<br />
power is turned on again, the stored print data will be printed first even if new<br />
print data has been sent.<br />
During printing<br />
■When LPD Spool is set to Hard Disk or Memory<br />
If the print data is larger than the hard disk or the remaining memory capacity at<br />
the point of receiving print data, the data will not be received.<br />
When the print data has exceeded the receiving capacity, some host devices may re-send the data<br />
immediately. When this occurs, the host device appears as if it has crashed. To rectify the situation,<br />
stop the host device from sending print data.<br />
■When LPD Spool is set to Off (non-spool mode)<br />
If the machine has accepted a print request from a host device, it cannot accept<br />
any print request from other host device.<br />
■When the IP address or computer name of the host device is changed<br />
When the IP address or computer name of the host device is changed, it may not<br />
be able to process enquiry or delete request from this machine correctly. Ensure<br />
that this machine is free of print data in the receive buffer, and then turn the<br />
power off/on.<br />
You can use the touch panel display to stop/eject print data spooled to the receive buffer of this<br />
machine. For details on the way to do this, see “7.2.8 Forcibly Outputting Data Wait Documents” in<br />
“Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier) or “3.6.2 Canceling Printing From <strong>Printer</strong>” (P. 58) of<br />
“Part 1 <strong>Printer</strong>”.
C.3 NetWare<br />
The precautions/limitations of using NetWare are as follows:<br />
During setting up<br />
C Precautions/Limitations<br />
■Setting up of this machine<br />
If setting the port to Enabled leads to insufficient memory, the port status may be<br />
set to Disabled automatically. In this case, either set the port to Disabled when it<br />
is not used or change the memory allocation capacity.<br />
■Setting up environment for PCONSOLE<br />
Take note of the following points when setting up environment using PCON-<br />
SOLE:<br />
Item For PServer Mode<br />
No. of file server Up to 16 servers<br />
No. of print queue Up to 48 queues<br />
No. of notifying candidate Up to 48 users<br />
No. of password character Up to 32 characters<br />
If 33 or more characters are used for the password, printing cannot be carried out.<br />
■Using bindery reference queue (for directory service/PServer mode)<br />
This machine does not support bindery reference queue. As such, printing with<br />
bindery reference queue is not allowed.<br />
Appendix<br />
241
Appendix<br />
242<br />
C Precautions/Limitations<br />
During printing<br />
■When using CAPTURE/NPRINT<br />
There are optional features not supported by NetWare.<br />
: Supported (features of this machine)<br />
*<br />
: Features of the file server or workstation<br />
× : Not supported<br />
Option PServer<br />
CAPTURE NPRINT Mode<br />
SHow ⎯ *<br />
NOTify / NoNOTIfy NOTify / NoNOTIfy<br />
TImeout ⎯ *<br />
AUtoendcap /<br />
NoAutoendcap<br />
⎯ *<br />
Local = n ⎯ *<br />
⎯ PrintServer =<br />
Server = Server = *<br />
Queue = Queue = *<br />
Create = ⎯ *<br />
Job = Job = *<br />
Keep ⎯ *<br />
Form = n Form = n<br />
Copies = n Copies = n<br />
Remarks<br />
⎯ Delete *<br />
Tabs = n / NoTabs Tabs = n / NoTabs × Cannot guarantee correct<br />
printing<br />
Banner /NoBanner Banner /NoBanner ×<br />
FormFeed /<br />
NoFormFeed<br />
CONversion /<br />
NoCONversion<br />
FormFeed /<br />
NoFormFeed<br />
CONversion /<br />
NoCONversion<br />
JApanese / ENglish Japanese / ENglish ×<br />
■When printing with Windows application programs<br />
When the setting to print at High Speed is invalid, printing may not be done correctly.<br />
When you print from Windows application program, enable the High<br />
Speed setting.<br />
×<br />
×
Print control time<br />
C Precautions/Limitations<br />
■When using PSC/PCONSOLE<br />
Take note of the following points when carrying out print control using PSC/<br />
PCONSOLE with directory service or bindery service.<br />
There are optional features not supported by NetWare.<br />
: Supported (features of this machine)<br />
× : Not supported<br />
Parameter PServer<br />
PSC PCONSOLE Mode<br />
STATus ⎯<br />
Remarks<br />
PAUse <strong>Printer</strong> Pause In print server mode, the status<br />
of this machine becomes<br />
Stop.<br />
ABort Abort Job<br />
STOp [Keep] <strong>Printer</strong> Stop =<br />
STARt <strong>Printer</strong> Start<br />
--- <strong>Printer</strong> Rewind<br />
MArk Paper Tip Mark ×<br />
FormFeed Form Feed ×<br />
MOuntForm=n Load Paper<br />
PRIvate ⎯ ×<br />
SHared ⎯ ×<br />
CancelDown ⎯ ×<br />
Appendix<br />
243
Appendix<br />
244<br />
C Precautions/Limitations<br />
C.4 Scan Features<br />
The precautions/limitations of using the scan features are as follows:<br />
The “Network <strong>Scanner</strong> Driver Readme.txt” in the PCL Driver/Network Utility CD-ROM for details on<br />
the precautions/limitations on the network scanner driver and mailbox viewer.<br />
When retrieving documents from mailbox<br />
Display<br />
● When Delete/Save Documents is set to Save, the same document can be<br />
accessed by multiple clients.<br />
● When Delete/Save Documents is set to Delete, the number of multiple clients<br />
that can access the same document is only one. The document which is being<br />
saved or imported by a client cannot be seen from other clients.<br />
In both cases, you can add documents to the mailbox which is being accessed.<br />
When a document with many colors is scanned, the image cannot be displayed<br />
in the correct colors if the display mode does not support the display of the number<br />
of colors scanned. Use the display mode which supports the display of the<br />
number of colors scanned or more.<br />
Using network scanner driver and mailbox viewer simultaneously<br />
You cannot use the network scanner driver and mailbox viewer together from<br />
one computer to connect to this machine.<br />
When retrieving documents from multiple computers, you can retrieve documents<br />
from up to three of the same machine at the same time using the network<br />
scanner driver or mailbox viewer 2 by multiple computers.<br />
When printing documents saved in the mailbox<br />
When Mailbox is selected, only fax documents can be printed when printing<br />
saved documents using the touch panel display. Scanned documents cannot be<br />
printed.<br />
When polling from other fax machines<br />
When the machine is polled from other fax machines, scanned documents cannot<br />
be sent.<br />
When using TIFF files<br />
The TIFF files created by using Job Template or the mailbox viewer will be compressed<br />
to MMR or MH format. To open TIFF files, use an application program<br />
which supports these compression formats.
Restriction on scanning capacity<br />
C Precautions/Limitations<br />
The maximum scanning capacity of one page is 297 × 432 mm. For standard<br />
sizes, it is A3 or 11 × 17".<br />
Number of sheets of documents for scanning (using mailbox)<br />
Using mailbox, the number of sheets of documents which can be scanned at one<br />
time is 999 pages. The number of sheets for scanning may change according to<br />
the document size and resolution.<br />
C.5 Print Auditron<br />
The precautions/limitations for using Print Auditron are as follows.<br />
● When the PS driver is being used for shared printers, the Print Auditron does<br />
not function properly. Install the printer driver on each of the client PCs that will<br />
be using Print Auditron on the PS driver.<br />
● When using the PCL driver on a printer with a shared server, turn off the EMF.<br />
If it is turned on operations will not be correct due to transmission of faulty information.<br />
● When changing the setting for Specify Job Owner in the printer driver, enter the<br />
password again. Operations may not be correct due to unintended information<br />
being transmitted if the previously set password is used as is.<br />
Appendix<br />
245
Appendix<br />
246<br />
D Troubleshooting<br />
When<br />
Using SMB<br />
This section describes the possible causes, ways of verification, and the recommended<br />
actions for errors which may occur when using SMB.<br />
D.1 Cannot Find <strong>Printer</strong><br />
Cause Verification Action<br />
Transport protocol of the host<br />
device and this machine is different.<br />
There are multiple browsers.<br />
The network (subnet) is wrong.<br />
Name search of the host name<br />
is not working correctly (when<br />
transport protocol is TCP/IP).<br />
Host name specified on this<br />
machine already exists.<br />
On the host device, you can find<br />
the printer when it has been<br />
searched as “another computer”<br />
(Start > Find > Computer) but<br />
not when searched in the Network<br />
Neighborhood.<br />
When the PING command is<br />
issued, specifying the IP<br />
address of this machine gets a<br />
response but not when specifying<br />
the host name.<br />
Print out the System Settings<br />
List, and check if the status of<br />
SMB indicates “repetitive host<br />
name”.<br />
↑<br />
↑<br />
Specify similar protocol for SMB<br />
for host device and this machine.<br />
When there are multiple host<br />
devices within the same workgroup,<br />
change the Auto Master<br />
Mode in the SMB setting file,<br />
config.txt to Off.<br />
When this machine and the host<br />
device is in a different network,<br />
consult your system administrator.<br />
Check the settings of the SMB<br />
setting file, config.txt (WINS 1st<br />
server, WINS 2nd server, Subnet<br />
mask) with the settings on<br />
the host device (e.g. WINS,<br />
DNS, LMHOST).<br />
Change the Host name of the<br />
SMB setting file, config.txt to<br />
another name not in use.<br />
Also, either change the host<br />
name used by CentreWare Internet<br />
Services to another name<br />
not in use or reset this machine<br />
to default settings.
D.2 Cannot Print<br />
D Troubleshooting When Using SMB<br />
Cause Verification Action<br />
This machine is processing print<br />
request from other host devices<br />
(for non-spool mode only).<br />
Exceeded the maximum number<br />
of connections of this<br />
machine.<br />
The user name and password is<br />
not correctly set at the printer<br />
properties when using the<br />
Auditron feature.<br />
Check if this machine is processing<br />
printing. (An error message<br />
about insufficient storing space<br />
for waiting print jobs is displayed.)<br />
Check if this machine is processing<br />
requests (e.g. print requests,<br />
status enquiry) from multiple host<br />
devices simultaneously. (An error<br />
message about remote computer<br />
cannot be used is displayed.)<br />
On the Configuration tab of the<br />
the printer properties, check the<br />
setting of Specify Job Owner.<br />
After this machine has completed<br />
the processing, either send a<br />
print request or switch to spool<br />
mode on this machine.<br />
Wait for a while, and then send<br />
print request again. Or increase<br />
the value of Maximum Sessions<br />
on the SMB setting file, config.txt,<br />
and then reboot this machine.<br />
Specify the correct user name<br />
and password at Specify Job<br />
Owner.<br />
D.3 Cannot Delete Documents From <strong>Printer</strong><br />
Window<br />
Cause Verification Action<br />
Tried to delete all documents<br />
displayed in the <strong>Printer</strong> window<br />
(only possible for system administrator).<br />
Check if you are trying to delete<br />
print jobs from the <strong>Printer</strong> menu<br />
(Clear print jobs menu).<br />
Owner of print job is not correct. Check if the Owner of the select<br />
print job is similar to the name<br />
used for login to Windows.<br />
Service Pack 4.0 and later is not<br />
installed.<br />
(For Windows NT 4.0)<br />
Check the version of the Service<br />
Pack displayed when Windows<br />
NT 4.0 is activated.<br />
Select the print job you want to<br />
delete and then cancel it from<br />
the Document menu of the<br />
<strong>Printer</strong> window (Cancel Printing<br />
menu).<br />
Login to Windows again using<br />
the name of the Owner of the<br />
print job and then delete the print<br />
job.<br />
Install Service Pack 4.0 or later.<br />
Appendix<br />
247
Appendix<br />
248<br />
D Troubleshooting When Using SMB<br />
D.4 Cannot Auto Download <strong>Printer</strong> Driver<br />
Cause Verification Action<br />
Auto download feature is not<br />
working.<br />
Different printer drivers are<br />
saved.<br />
<strong>Printer</strong> driver is not saved within<br />
two levels from the Drivers<br />
folder.<br />
<strong>Printer</strong> driver is not saved in a<br />
folder which is named within<br />
eight alphanumeric characters.<br />
Check the Auto Driver Download<br />
setting of the SMB setting file,<br />
config.txt (only possible for system<br />
administrator).<br />
Check the printer type to see if<br />
the correct printer driver is<br />
saved.<br />
Check if the folder containing the<br />
printer driver is within two levels<br />
from the Drivers folder.<br />
Open the driver.txt of the Drivers<br />
folder, and then check if the<br />
message is “The folder name is<br />
not within eight alphanumeric<br />
characters”.<br />
Set the Auto Driver Download in<br />
the SMB setting file, config.txt to<br />
Enable and then reboot the<br />
machine.<br />
After saving the correct printer<br />
driver, reboot the machine.<br />
Save the printer driver in a folder<br />
within two levels from the Drivers<br />
folder, and then reboot the<br />
machine.<br />
Change the folder name to one<br />
using up to eight alphanumeric<br />
characters, and then reboot the<br />
machine.
E Troubleshooting<br />
When<br />
Using TCP/IP<br />
This section describes the possible causes, ways of verification, and the recommended<br />
actions for errors which may occur when using TCP/IP (LPD).<br />
E.1 For Windows 95, Windows 98,<br />
Windows Me<br />
Cause Status Display/Verification/Action<br />
The machine and host device<br />
are connected to different networks.<br />
An error has occurred in the network<br />
between the host device<br />
and this machine, and the connection<br />
cannot be established.<br />
This machine is switched off<br />
after the host device has sent a<br />
print request. Or the print<br />
request is sent to the machine<br />
when it is switched off.<br />
Print requests from multiple host<br />
devices are sent to this machine<br />
at the same time.<br />
Printing files cannot be spooled<br />
due to insufficient disk capacity<br />
of the host device.<br />
Status “Unable to print (Network Error)”<br />
Display<br />
Verification Check with the network system administrator to verify<br />
that the network connecting the host device and that<br />
connecting this machine are linked by a router or gateway.<br />
Action Connect this machine directly to the network connecting<br />
the host device.<br />
Status “Unable to print (Network Error)”<br />
Display<br />
Verification None<br />
Action Ask the network system administrator to check the<br />
network for errors.<br />
Status<br />
Display<br />
“Unable to print (Network Error)”<br />
Verification Check if this machine is switched on.<br />
Action Switch on this machine.<br />
Status<br />
Display<br />
“Unable to print (Network Error)”<br />
Verification None<br />
Action None (printing will be re-processed automatically).<br />
Status “Unable to print (Spool Error)”<br />
Display<br />
Verification Open My Computer and right-click the disk (e.g. Cdrive)<br />
installed with the system. Select Properties from<br />
the menu displayed and then check the free space<br />
available.<br />
Action After deleting unnecessary files to increase the free<br />
disk space, select Pause Printing from the Document<br />
menu of the <strong>Printer</strong> window to enable printing to<br />
restart.<br />
Appendix<br />
249
Appendix<br />
250<br />
E Troubleshooting When Using TCP/IP<br />
E.2 For Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000,<br />
Windows XP<br />
When printer is not printing<br />
Cause Verification Action<br />
Incorrect IP address is set. Ask the network system administrator<br />
to check if the IP address<br />
of this machine is correct.<br />
When LPD spool is set to Memory,<br />
the print data sent by the<br />
host device in one print request<br />
has exceeded the upper limit of<br />
the receiving capacity.<br />
An irrecoverable error has<br />
occurred during print processing.<br />
The transport protocol is different<br />
from that of the host device.<br />
Data format of the print data to<br />
be processed by this machine is<br />
different from that sent by the<br />
host device.<br />
Check the memory capacity of<br />
LPD spool, and then compare it<br />
with the print data which was<br />
sent in one print request.<br />
Check if there is any error displayed<br />
on the printer control<br />
panel.<br />
Check the selected transport<br />
protocol.<br />
When target print result is not obtained<br />
⎯<br />
Set the correct IP address for<br />
this machine.<br />
1. If the print data is a single file<br />
and exceeding the upper limit<br />
of the memory capacity, split<br />
the file into smaller ones not<br />
exceeding the said upper<br />
limit, and then send for printing.<br />
2. If the print data are multiple<br />
files and have exceeded the<br />
upper limit of the receiving<br />
capacity, reduce the number<br />
of files to be sent for printing<br />
at one time.<br />
Switch the machine off and on.<br />
Switch on the machine only<br />
when there is nothing on the display.<br />
Select the same transport protocol<br />
as that of the host device.<br />
Disable the output function of<br />
Ctrl-D.<br />
Cause Verification Action<br />
The specified print language is<br />
different from that of the print<br />
data.<br />
<strong>Printer</strong> driver of this machine is<br />
not used (printer driver of other<br />
companies used instead).<br />
Check the specified print language<br />
and that of the print data.<br />
Check that the printer driver of<br />
this machine is selected.<br />
Specify a similar print language<br />
for the print data.<br />
Select the printer driver of this<br />
machine. If it does not appear as<br />
an option, install and select it. If<br />
a printer driver from other company<br />
is used, the machine may<br />
not function properly.
F Troubleshooting<br />
When<br />
Using NetWare<br />
This section describes the possible causes, ways of verification, and the recommended<br />
actions for errors which may occur when using NetWare.<br />
F.1 When Not Printed<br />
Cause Verification Action<br />
The network component board<br />
(e.g. HUB) is not compatible with<br />
the automatic setting of the<br />
frame type.<br />
There is a breakdown in the network<br />
from the workstation to the<br />
printer.<br />
The user name or group name of<br />
the person sending the job is not<br />
registered in <strong>User</strong> of the print<br />
queue.<br />
Job sending to the print queue is<br />
prohibited.<br />
Check if the data link lamp of the<br />
network component board connected<br />
to this machine is on.<br />
Check if the frame type of the file<br />
server in the network is similar.<br />
Using NWADMIN from the workstation,<br />
check if the target printer<br />
object can be seen. *<br />
Using NWADMIN from the workstation<br />
and referring to the target<br />
queue object, check if the user<br />
name or group name of the person<br />
sending the job is registered<br />
in <strong>User</strong>. *<br />
Using PCONSOLE, check if Yes<br />
is set for <strong>User</strong> can register with<br />
the queue at the Current Queue<br />
Status of Print Queue.<br />
Using NWADMIN from workstation,<br />
check if the operator flag is<br />
checked at Recognition of the<br />
target print queue. *<br />
From this machine, set up the<br />
frame type specified to the file<br />
server which you want to connect<br />
to.<br />
Replace the network cable<br />
between the workstation and the<br />
printer that cannot be used for<br />
transmitting data.<br />
1. Re-send the print job to the<br />
print queue with the registered<br />
user name or group<br />
name of the person sending<br />
the job registered in <strong>User</strong> of<br />
Print Queue.<br />
2. Using NWADMIN from the<br />
workstation, register the user<br />
name or group name of the<br />
person sending the job at<br />
<strong>User</strong> of Print Queue*<br />
Using PCONSOLE, set to Yes.<br />
Using NWADMIN from workstation,<br />
check if each item of the<br />
operator flag is checked at Recognition<br />
of the target print<br />
queue. *<br />
Appendix<br />
251
Appendix<br />
252<br />
F Troubleshooting When Using NetWare<br />
Cause Verification Action<br />
The user name or group name of<br />
the person sending the job is not<br />
registered in print server user of<br />
the print queue.<br />
The print queue that sent the<br />
print job is not assigned to the<br />
printer.<br />
The settings of the data format<br />
of print job are not similar to that<br />
of the printing environment of the<br />
workstation.<br />
A print queue which exceeded<br />
the maximum number of supported<br />
queues of the printer has<br />
been set.<br />
The slave file server is not set<br />
(bindery service mode).<br />
Using NWADMIN from the workstation,<br />
check if the user name<br />
or group name of the person<br />
sending the job is registered in<br />
<strong>User</strong> of the target print server. *<br />
Using NWADMIN from the workstation,<br />
check if the target printer<br />
is assigned to the serviced<br />
printer in the list under <strong>User</strong> of<br />
the target print queue.*<br />
⎯<br />
Using NWADMIN from the workstation,<br />
check if the desired print<br />
queue is assigned to the print<br />
queue list under <strong>User</strong> of the target<br />
print. *<br />
Using PCONSOLE from the<br />
workstation, check if the slave<br />
file server is registered in Service<br />
NetWare Server under the<br />
print server corresponding to the<br />
Print Server Information. *<br />
<strong>Printer</strong> type is wrong. Using PCONSOLE from the<br />
workstation, check if the following<br />
settings are set under <strong>Printer</strong><br />
Information > <strong>Printer</strong> > <strong>Printer</strong><br />
xxx Environment: <strong>Printer</strong>= Parallel,<br />
Port= LPT1, Position= Auto<br />
mode (local).*<br />
The slave file server setting is<br />
wrong (bindery service mode).<br />
Using PCONSOLE from the<br />
workstation, check if printer type<br />
is set as Defined under <strong>Printer</strong><br />
Information > <strong>Printer</strong> > <strong>Printer</strong><br />
xxx Environment.*<br />
1. Re-send the print job to the<br />
print queue with the registered<br />
user name or group<br />
name of the person sending<br />
the job registered in <strong>User</strong> of<br />
Print Server Information.<br />
2. Using NWADMIN from the<br />
workstation, register the user<br />
name or group name of the<br />
person sending the job at<br />
<strong>User</strong> of the target print<br />
server. *<br />
1. Re-send the print job to a<br />
print queue assigned to the<br />
printer. *<br />
2. Using NWADMIN from the<br />
workstation, add the target<br />
queue as an addition to <strong>User</strong><br />
of the target printer. *<br />
For workstation using Windows,<br />
disable the output function of<br />
Ctrl-D.<br />
Re-send the print job to a print<br />
queue assigned to the printer. *<br />
After registering the slave file<br />
server using PCONSOLE from<br />
the workstation, reflect the setting<br />
parameters.<br />
Using PCONSOLE from the<br />
workstation, set <strong>Printer</strong>= Parallel,<br />
Port= LPT1, Position= Auto<br />
mode (local) and reflect the setting<br />
parameters. *<br />
If it is not Defined, change it to<br />
Defined and then reflect the setting<br />
parameters.*
The number of paper definition<br />
specified at the print server is<br />
not the same as that of paper<br />
definition set at the print queue.<br />
Using NWADMIN from the workstation,<br />
check if the paper definition<br />
specified at the print server<br />
is same as that of paper definition<br />
set at the print queue.*<br />
F Troubleshooting When Using NetWare<br />
Cause Verification Action<br />
The level setting for IPX checksum<br />
is wrong.<br />
The level setting for NCP packet<br />
signature is wrong.<br />
The default device name is<br />
wrong.<br />
The directory tree name is not<br />
set.<br />
At the console screen of the file<br />
server, execute a set command<br />
and check if the IPX checksum<br />
is set to level 2.<br />
At the console screen of the file<br />
server, execute a set command<br />
and check if the NCP packet signature<br />
is set to level 3.<br />
Print out the System Settings<br />
List, and check the lower six<br />
characters (3 bytes) of the Ethernet<br />
address.<br />
Print out the System Settings<br />
List and check if the tree name is<br />
specified.<br />
Context is not set. Print out the System Settings<br />
List and check if the context is<br />
specified.<br />
Connected to another printer<br />
object.<br />
NetWare port cannot be activated<br />
by setting.<br />
Using NWADMIN from the workstation,<br />
check if the object is correctly<br />
assigned by the layout<br />
information of the desired print<br />
server. *<br />
Print out the System Settings<br />
List and check if the NetWare<br />
port is activated.<br />
File server is down. Search for the target file server<br />
in Network Neighborhood.<br />
Using NWADMIN from the workstation,<br />
specify the same number<br />
of paper definition at the<br />
print server as that of paper definition<br />
set at the print queue. *<br />
At the console screen of the file<br />
server, enter the following command<br />
and set the IPX checksum<br />
to level 0 or 1:<br />
set Enable IPX Checksum = x (x:<br />
0 or 1)<br />
At the console screen of the file<br />
server, enter the following command<br />
and after setting the NCP<br />
packet signature to level 0, 1, or<br />
2, restart the file server:<br />
set NCP Packet Signature<br />
Option = x (x: 0, 1, or 2)<br />
1. Set the device name using<br />
the correct Ethernet address.<br />
2. Set the device name to any<br />
name except the default<br />
name.<br />
Set the tree name.<br />
Set the context.<br />
1. Using the PCL Driver/Network<br />
Utility CD-ROM from the<br />
workstation, set the file<br />
server name, tree name, context,<br />
active mode correctly.<br />
2. Using the CentreWare Internet<br />
Services from the workstation,<br />
set the file server<br />
name, tree name, context,<br />
active mode correctly.<br />
Activate the NetWare port.<br />
Activating the file server.<br />
Appendix<br />
253
Appendix<br />
254<br />
F Troubleshooting When Using NetWare<br />
Cause Verification Action<br />
There are printers with similar<br />
device name on the network.<br />
Switch off the machine and<br />
using NWADMIN from the workstation,<br />
check that the status of<br />
the corresponding printer object<br />
is job waiting.<br />
NetWare port is not activated. Print out the System Settings<br />
List and check if the network<br />
number when using IPX/SPX is<br />
at “00000000” (NetWare server<br />
down). Also, check if the IP<br />
address when using TCP/IP is at<br />
“0.0.0.0” (fixed IP not set or<br />
address supply server (DHCP)<br />
down).<br />
Using the CentreWare Driver &<br />
Network Utility CD-ROM from<br />
the workstation, set another host<br />
name.<br />
For IPX/SPX, activate NetWare<br />
server. For TCP/IP, set the fixed<br />
IP address or activate the<br />
address supply server (DHCP).<br />
*: Refer to “NetWare Online Documentation” for details on how to set and check.<br />
F.2 When “Switch off the power” Appears<br />
Cause Verification Action<br />
An error occurs in NetWare. ⎯ Switch the machine off and on.<br />
Switch on the machine only<br />
when there is nothing on the display.<br />
F.3 When Target Print Result Is Not Obtained<br />
Cause Verification Action<br />
The print language of the print<br />
job is different from that set up<br />
on this machine.<br />
Check the print language of this<br />
machine.<br />
Set the same print language for<br />
the print job and this machine.
F.4 No Notification<br />
F Troubleshooting When Using NetWare<br />
The possible causes, verification methods and recommended actions when<br />
there are no messages on the workstation which have been sent print instructions<br />
are as follows:<br />
No notification of printer errors<br />
Cause Verification Action<br />
Not registered in the Notify Candidate<br />
List of the print server.<br />
No notification of end of job<br />
Using PCONSOLE from the<br />
workstation, check if the user<br />
name and group name of the<br />
person sending the job is registered<br />
in Print Server Information<br />
> <strong>Printer</strong> > <strong>Printer</strong> xxx Environment<br />
Settings > Notify.<br />
Register the user name or group<br />
name of the person sending the<br />
job in Notify.<br />
Cause Verification Action<br />
When sending jobs from the<br />
workstation, the NOTIFY option<br />
is not specified.<br />
The NetWare CASTOFF utility is<br />
executed on the user workstation.<br />
Check if the NOTIFY option is<br />
specified when sending the print<br />
job.<br />
⎯<br />
Specify the NOTIFY option when<br />
sending the print job.<br />
Execute the NetWare CASTON<br />
utility on the user workstation.<br />
Appendix<br />
255
Appendix<br />
256<br />
G Troubleshooting<br />
for<br />
CentreWare Internet Services<br />
This section describes the causes and recommended actions for errors that occur while<br />
using CentreWare Internet Services.<br />
Cause Action<br />
Cannot connect to CentreWare<br />
Internet Services.<br />
The “Please wait” message is<br />
displayed throughout.<br />
The Refresh button is not working.<br />
Selecting menu in the left frame<br />
does not change the right frame<br />
contents.<br />
Is this machine working properly?<br />
Check if the power of this machine is switched on.<br />
Is CentreWare Internet Services activated?<br />
Print out the System Settings List to check.<br />
Is the Internet address correctly entered?<br />
Check the Internet address again. If cannot be connected, enter the<br />
IP address to make connection.<br />
Is the proxy server being used?<br />
Depending on the proxy server, connections might not be possible.<br />
Without using the proxy server, configure either the browser setting<br />
to “Not using proxy server” or the address to be used to “Not using<br />
proxy server”.<br />
Wait for a while as instructed.<br />
If nothing happens, try clicking the Refresh button.<br />
And even then, if nothing happens, check if this machine is working<br />
properly.<br />
Are you using the specified OS and browser?<br />
See “5.1.4 Target OS and Browsers” (P. 109) in “Part 1 <strong>Printer</strong>”, and<br />
check if the OS and browser in use can be used.<br />
The screen display is distorted. Change the window size of the browser.<br />
The latest information is not dis- Click the Refresh button.<br />
played.<br />
Characters are not correctly dis- Use Western European language command.<br />
played.<br />
Clicking the Apply New Settings<br />
button does not reflect the new<br />
settings.<br />
Clicking the Apply New Settings<br />
button will display in the<br />
browser, messages like “The<br />
server has returned ineffective<br />
or unrecognizable response.” or<br />
“No data”.<br />
Is the entered value correct?<br />
If the entered value is not a valid entry, it will change automatically to<br />
an entry within the limit.<br />
Is the password correct?<br />
The entry for Password is not similar to Confirm Password. Enter the<br />
correct password.<br />
Reboot this machine.<br />
Cannot delete job. Wait for a while and then click the Refresh button.
H Automatic<br />
Gradation<br />
Adjustment<br />
When the color gradation of the print image is out, it can be automatically adjusted. Through<br />
this gradation adjustment, the image quality of this machine can be consistently maintained.<br />
“3.4 Executing Automatic Gradation Adjustment” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier) for details on<br />
adjusting the gradation.<br />
Adjusting for printing<br />
When adjusting gradation for the printing of data such as text, select Print Job -<br />
Text.<br />
Auto Gradation Adjustment<br />
Copy Job - Text<br />
Copy Job - Photo<br />
Print Job - Text<br />
Print Job - Photo<br />
When adjusting gradation for the printing of data such as photos, select Print<br />
Job - Photo.<br />
Auto Gradation Adjustment<br />
Copy Job - Text<br />
Copy Job - Photo<br />
Print Job - Text<br />
Print Job - Photo<br />
Close<br />
Start<br />
Close<br />
Start<br />
Appendix<br />
257
Appendix<br />
258<br />
I<br />
A3<br />
420 × 297 mm paper.<br />
A4<br />
297 × 210 mm paper.<br />
A5<br />
210 × 148 mm paper.<br />
B4<br />
364 × 257 mm paper.<br />
B5<br />
257 × 182 mm paper.<br />
Glossary<br />
CMYK<br />
A way of expressing colors in process like<br />
color printing.<br />
It is divided into four colors of Cyan (C),<br />
Magenta (M), Yellow (Y), and Black (K),<br />
which are layered for printing.<br />
DPI<br />
Stands for Dot Per Inch, which is the number<br />
of dots that can be printed within a width<br />
of 1 inch. Used as the unit for resolution.<br />
ICM<br />
Stands for Image Color Matching, which is<br />
the color management software adopted by<br />
Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000,<br />
Windows XP. It corrects the differences in<br />
color due to devices so that the color of the<br />
print result is similar to that on the screen.<br />
Image Enhancement<br />
Feature which makes the border between<br />
black and white smooth, with rough edges<br />
reduced, giving the appearance of a higher<br />
resolution.<br />
NV Memory<br />
Non-volatile memory which allows the settings<br />
of the printer to be maintained even<br />
when power is off.<br />
RAM<br />
Stands for Random Access Memory, which<br />
is the memory device where information can<br />
be retrieved as well as reduced.<br />
ROM<br />
Stands for Read Only Memory, which is the<br />
memory device specific for the retrieval of<br />
information.<br />
Printable area<br />
The actual area on paper which can be<br />
printed.<br />
Emulation<br />
The ability of the printer to perform the features<br />
of other printers. The mode is called<br />
emulation mode.<br />
Resolution<br />
Expresses the fineness of the image. Usually,<br />
it is expressed by the number of dots<br />
per inch (dpi) so that the larger the value,<br />
the higher the resolution (details can be<br />
reproduced).<br />
Gradation<br />
Refers to the smoothness between colors.<br />
Expresses the number of gradations by the<br />
number of levels, so that the larger the<br />
value, the smoother the colors.<br />
Cut paper<br />
Paper of standard sizes like A4, B5.<br />
Common Menu<br />
The menu for common settings of the print<br />
mode, and consists of Meter Check, Setup,<br />
Report/List, System Settings, Network/Port<br />
Settings, Memory Settings, Initialization/<br />
Data Deletion, Print Settings, and Automatic<br />
Gradation Adjustment.<br />
Gradation<br />
The change in the continuous color density<br />
seen in photos and illustrations.
Receive buffer<br />
Buffer is the location to store data sent from<br />
the client temporarily. By increasing the<br />
memory capacity of the receive buffer, the<br />
client can be freed faster.<br />
Default value<br />
Factory default settings and settings upon<br />
NV memory initialization.<br />
Job<br />
A group of print data. The canceling and<br />
outputting of printing is done on a job basis.<br />
Screen<br />
For devices like printers, the density of<br />
printed matter is expressed in shaded dots,<br />
and the column of these dots or number of<br />
lines during printing are known as screen<br />
lines. Gradations which can be displayed<br />
change according to the number of screen<br />
lines.<br />
Protocol<br />
Rules of communication necessary for carrying<br />
out data transmission.<br />
Print page buffer<br />
Location where print data is actually processed<br />
and stored.<br />
I Glossary<br />
<strong>Printer</strong> driver<br />
The software which changes data created<br />
by the application program into data which<br />
can be interpreted by the printer.<br />
Mode Menu<br />
The menu for setting fixed conditions for<br />
processing each of the emulation modes of<br />
PCL emulation mode, HP-GL emulation<br />
mode, HP-GL/2 emulation mode.<br />
8K<br />
267 x 388 mm paper. Also called Hakkai.<br />
Appendix<br />
259
Appendix<br />
260<br />
J<br />
Q & A<br />
This section describes the frequently asked questions and their answers.<br />
Refer to them when using this machine.<br />
I wish to check the printer settings<br />
You can check the current printer settings by referring to the System Settings<br />
List.<br />
“6.6 Printing Reports/Lists” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier) for details on the<br />
<strong>Printer</strong> Settings List.<br />
I wish to know the available printing features<br />
For the PCL printer driver of this machine, the printing features include N Up, 2<br />
Sided, Poster, Booklet Creation.<br />
The On-line Help of the printer driver for details on each of these features.<br />
I wish to change the paper size of paper tray<br />
When you wish to temporarily use paper sizes other than those loaded in trays 1<br />
– 4, it is convenient to use tray 5 (Bypass Tray) for loading.<br />
You can change the paper sizes in trays 1 – 4.<br />
“3.2 About Paper” (P. 37) in “Part 1 <strong>Printer</strong>” for details on how to load paper in tray 5 (Bypass<br />
Tray) and change paper sizes of trays 1 – 4.<br />
I wish to print in black and white<br />
Black and white documents will be automatically detected and printed in black<br />
and white. To print color documents in black and white, select Black for Output<br />
Color on the printer properties dialog box.<br />
The On-line Help of the printer driver for details on printing in black and white.<br />
I wish to print with special paper<br />
By using tray 5 (Bypass Tray), you can print with special papers like heavyweight,<br />
transparency, lightweight. Special papers cannot be printed from trays 1<br />
– 4.<br />
“4.2 Printing Non-Standard Paper Size” (P. 66) in “Part 1 <strong>Printer</strong>” for details on printing with special<br />
papers.
I wish to print with the same image quality of the document<br />
J Q & A<br />
You can configure settings to match the document type (photo, text, presentation,<br />
web page etc.) and fine tune the colors.<br />
The On-line Help of the printer driver for details on printing the same image quality as the document.<br />
I wish to install the printer driver in multiple clients<br />
To install the printer driver with similar settings (e.g. printing features, port) to<br />
multiple clients, it will be convenient to use the setup disk creation tool.<br />
“3.4 Installing/Uninstalling the <strong>Printer</strong> Drivers” (P. 50) in “Part 1 <strong>Printer</strong>” for details on how to<br />
install the printer driver.<br />
Print request has been sent but printing is not carried out<br />
Print out the Job History Report or Error History Report and then check the print<br />
job which you sent.<br />
“3.6 Canceling Printing/Checking Job Status” (P. 57) in “Part 1 <strong>Printer</strong>” for details on checking the<br />
print jobs sent.<br />
“6.6 Printing Reports/Lists” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier) for details on the Job<br />
History Report and Error History Report.<br />
I wish to upgrade my OS for use with this machine<br />
There are printer drivers for each specific OS. Use the printer driver for your new<br />
OS for installation.<br />
“3.4 Installing/Uninstalling the <strong>Printer</strong> Drivers” (P. 50) in “Part 1 <strong>Printer</strong>” for details on how to<br />
install the printer driver.<br />
I wish to check whether the print job of my print request has been<br />
output<br />
By using the printer monitor of CentreWare Network Services which is included<br />
in the CD-ROM, you can check the status of print jobs on your computer. Also,<br />
you can use CentreWare Internet Services to delete print jobs from your computer.<br />
“Chapter 5 Configuring From Computer (CentreWare Internet Services)” (P. 105) in “Part 1<br />
<strong>Printer</strong>” for details on CentreWare Internet Services and printer monitor.<br />
Appendix<br />
261
Appendix<br />
262<br />
J Q & A<br />
I wish to check the number of sheets copied/printed<br />
You can check the number of sheets copied or printed using the control panel<br />
display. By printing out the Meter Report and <strong>Printer</strong> Meter Report, you can also<br />
check the number of sheets copied or printed according to client (job owner).<br />
“6.5 Confirming the Total Number of Copied/Printed Pages” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong><br />
<strong>Guide</strong> (Copier) for details on checking the number of sheets copied or printed.
Index<br />
Numerics<br />
100Base-TX.......................................................... 11<br />
10Base-T............................................................... 11<br />
A<br />
Auto tray switch.................................................... 38<br />
B<br />
Basic printing process......................................... 49<br />
BOOTP .................................................................. 13<br />
Border erase....................................................... 180<br />
C<br />
Cancel print jobs .................................................. 59<br />
Cancel printing .............................................. 57, 58<br />
Cancel scanning ....................................... 156, 157<br />
Canceling jobs in waiting/process..................... 58<br />
CentreWare Internet Services ......................... 106<br />
CentreWare Scanning Services ...................... 119<br />
Changing mailbox viewer settings .................. 212<br />
Check password ................................................ 127<br />
Checking job status ............................................. 60<br />
Checking scanned data in mailbox ................. 203<br />
Checking scanned data on computer............. 206<br />
Checking status of job in process of<br />
scanning .............................................................. 158<br />
Configuring machine (scan) ............................. 133<br />
Configuring scan settings ................................. 160<br />
Connecting by parallel interface ........................ 10<br />
Connecting by Token Ring interface ................ 11<br />
Contrast............................................................... 185<br />
Creating mailbox ................................................ 127<br />
Customizing non-standard paper size.............. 66<br />
D<br />
Delete/save document ...................................... 127<br />
Deleting scanned data in mailbox .................. 203<br />
Deleting scanned data on computer .............. 206<br />
DHCP .................................................................... 13<br />
Document weight .............................................. 144<br />
E<br />
Ethernet interface................................................ 11<br />
EtherTalk (option)................................................... 8<br />
Expanding print areas for printing .................... 89<br />
Extension tray ...................................................... 42<br />
F<br />
Flow of printing .................................................... 36<br />
Flow of setting (scan) ....................................... 120<br />
G<br />
Gradation adjustment ....................................... 257<br />
H<br />
How to display scanner name......................... 208<br />
How to import scanned data ........................... 210<br />
How to scan ....................................................... 154<br />
I<br />
Image compression .......................................... 189<br />
Import scanned data to computer................... 194<br />
Interface board (Token Ring) .......................... 235<br />
Interface cable ..................................................... 10<br />
Internal fonts ...................................................... 234<br />
Internet printing................................................ 7, 30<br />
Internet services ................................................ 112<br />
IPP......................................................................... 30<br />
J<br />
Job template .............................................. 119, 216<br />
Job template list ................................................ 218<br />
Jobs and maintenance screens...................... 114<br />
Index<br />
263
Index<br />
264<br />
JPEG file format ................................................ 154<br />
L<br />
Lighter/Darker .................................................... 185<br />
Loading capacity................................................ 144<br />
Loading documents........................................... 147<br />
Loading in DADF ............................................... 148<br />
Loading on document glass............................. 147<br />
Local printer............................................................ 4<br />
M<br />
Mailbox data....................................................... 194<br />
Mailbox name..................................................... 127<br />
Mailbox password.............................................. 127<br />
Memory allocation ............................................... 22<br />
Mixed size originals........................................... 168<br />
Moving paper guide ............................................ 44<br />
N<br />
NetWare............................................................ 7, 32<br />
Network printer ...................................................... 5<br />
Network scanner utility ..................................... 208<br />
Non-spool mode .................................................. 24<br />
O<br />
On-line help .......................................................... 49<br />
Original orientation ................................... 149, 166<br />
Outline fonts ....................................................... 234<br />
Output color (scan)............................................ 160<br />
Output side ........................................................... 39<br />
P<br />
Paper..................................................................... 37<br />
Paper guide .......................................................... 42<br />
Parallel interface.................................................. 10<br />
PCL memory ........................................................ 23<br />
Port for scanning ............................................... 122<br />
PostScript memory .............................................. 23<br />
Precautions/Limitations .................................... 237<br />
Print area .............................................................. 89<br />
Print page buffer .................................................. 22<br />
Printable area..................................................... 233<br />
<strong>Printer</strong> driver : installing ...................................... 50<br />
<strong>Printer</strong> environments............................................. 4<br />
<strong>Printer</strong> type ......................................................... 232<br />
Printing features................................................... 46<br />
Printing non-standard paper size ...................... 66<br />
Printing procedure ............................................... 46<br />
Printing secure print jobs.................................... 72<br />
Printing special papers ....................................... 64<br />
Printing speed .................................................... 232<br />
Printing system .................................................. 232<br />
R<br />
Receive buffer ...................................................... 23<br />
Reduce/Enlarge ................................................. 174<br />
Resolution........................................................... 232<br />
S<br />
Salutation ............................................................ 122<br />
Sample Print......................................................... 83<br />
Sample print ......................................................... 77<br />
Save in server .................................................... 216<br />
Scan area............................................................ 144<br />
Scan size ............................................................ 171<br />
<strong>Scanner</strong> driver.................................................... 208<br />
Secure print .......................................................... 70<br />
Setting IP address ........................................ 13, 14<br />
Setting port ........................................................... 18<br />
Setting printer environments................................ 3<br />
Setting scanner environment........................... 117<br />
Setting secure print ............................................. 70<br />
Setting spool......................................................... 23<br />
SMB ....................................................................... 26<br />
Spool mode .......................................................... 23<br />
STP ............................................................... 11, 235
Stroke fonts......................................................... 234<br />
Suitable document sizes................................... 144<br />
Suitable paper size ............................................ 144<br />
Switching printer off-line ..................................... 56<br />
T<br />
Target OS (scan) ............................................... 121<br />
TCP/IP (LPD).................................................... 6, 28<br />
TIFF file format................................................... 154<br />
Token Ring (option)............................................... 9<br />
Token Ring interface ........................................... 11<br />
U<br />
Using mailbox..................................................... 122<br />
Using scanning feature ..................................... 122<br />
UTP ............................................................... 11, 235<br />
W<br />
Warm-up time..................................................... 232<br />
Windows network (SMB) ...................................... 5<br />
Index<br />
265
Customer Response Sheet<br />
DocumentCentre C400/320/240 Series <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (<strong>Printer</strong>/<strong>Scanner</strong>) (DE3043E2-1)<br />
To improve our publications, we would appreciate your feedback regarding this guide. Please take a<br />
few moments to complete and return this form to us.<br />
● About Yourself<br />
1. How often do you use this guide?<br />
[ ] Daily [ ] Weekly [ ] Monthly [ ] Infrequently<br />
2. When do you usually refer to the guide?<br />
[ ] Doing a usual operation [ ] Using unfamiliar features<br />
[ ] Solving a problem<br />
3. Which part of the guide do you read frequently?<br />
Chapter/Section/Page:<br />
4. Where do you keep this guide?<br />
5. (Optional)<br />
Your Name: Occupation:<br />
Company or organization:<br />
Address:<br />
● About the <strong>Guide</strong><br />
Strongly Neutral Strongly<br />
agree<br />
disagree<br />
1. It is handy. 1 2 3 4 5<br />
2. It is easy to read. 1 2 3 4 5<br />
3. Titles of chapters and sections make sense. 1 2 3 4 5<br />
4. Information is logically placed. 1 2 3 4 5<br />
5. Referencing is easy. 1 2 3 4 5<br />
6. Content is easy to understand. 1 2 3 4 5<br />
7. The step-by-step instructions are easy to follow. 1 2 3 4 5<br />
8. All necessary information is included. 1 2 3 4 5<br />
9. Illustrations aid in the understanding of content. 1 2 3 4 5<br />
10. The use of color is effective. 1 2 3 4 5<br />
Other comments:<br />
After completing this form, detach and send it to the address below.<br />
(Please use your own envelope and postage stamp.)<br />
Thank you for your cooperation.<br />
<strong>Fuji</strong> <strong>Xerox</strong> Co., Ltd.<br />
KSP R&D 2D7<br />
3-2-1, Sakado, Takatsu-ku<br />
Kawasaki-shi, Kanagawa-ken<br />
JAPAN 213-0012.<br />
✂
DocumentCentre C400/320/240 Series <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (<strong>Printer</strong>/<strong>Scanner</strong>)<br />
Human Interface Design Development<br />
Document Products & Supply Company<br />
<strong>Fuji</strong> <strong>Xerox</strong> Co., Ltd.<br />
DE3043E2-1 (Edition 2)<br />
July 2003<br />
Copyright © 2003 by <strong>Fuji</strong> <strong>Xerox</strong> Co., Ltd.